08 COMPACT Prekidaci 80-3200A

<< Back LV circuit breakers and
switch-disconnectors
Compact Merlin Gerin

Catalogue 80 to 3200 A
S
mpact N
New Co
Building a New Electric World

colibris
046751
Compact NS 80 A
045345
Compact NS 100 to 250 A

053100
Things
will never be
the same
E45151
New Compact NS,

setting the standard, once again...
The launch of Merlin Gerin Compact NS in 1994
revolutionised the world of moulded-case circuit breakers.
Innovative, flexible and attractive, Compact NS rapidly set
the standard in its field.
Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate, extending
Compact NS 630 to 1600 A the Compact NS range to high power ratings to offer
a comprehensive and consistent range from 80 to 3200 A.
Equipped with the new generation of Micrologic control
units, Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers integrate
electrical measurement and analysis functions.
The communications option makes it possible to control
E45178
power consumption, simplify maintenance and improve

operating comfort.
A wide range of optimised auxiliaries and accessories is
also available to meet the needs of even more applications.
Compact NS, simply a step ahead…
Compact NS,
even more applications...
Protection of LV distribution systems p. 14

E20999
Protection for:
b distribution systems supplied by transformers
b distribution systems supplied by engine generator sets
b long cables in IT and TN systems.
push
to
trip
Installation :
b in power switchboards
b on DIN rails (see page 42)
Special applications:
b single-phase and two-phase systems (see page 34)
b 1000 V distribution systems (see page 36)
b 400 Hz distribution systems (see page 38)
b DC systems (see page 40).
All circuit breakers in the Compact NS range offer positive contact indication
and are suitable for isolation in compliance with standards IEC 60947-1 and 2.
Protection of motor feeders p. 44

E26988
When combined with a motor starter, Compact NS circuit breakers protect the
cables and the starter against short-circuits. Equipped with an electronic trip unit,
Compact NS circuit breakers also protect the cables, starter and motor against
overloads.
The exceptional current-limiting capacity of Compact NS circuit breakers
automatically ensures type-2 coordination with the motor starter, in compliance with
standard IEC 60947-4-1.
Protection of machines p. 52
E44356
The different circuit-breaker versions in the Compact NS range are designed to

meet the specific requirements of machines:
b compliance with international standards IEC 60947-2 and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 No. 14
b compliance with U.S. standard UL 489
b protection against overloads and short-circuits
b positive contact indication
b installation in universal and functional enclosures.
Earth-leakage protection p. 56
E44357
Additional earth-leakage protection protects life and property against the risks
of faulty insulation in the installation. Depending on the circuit breaker,
earth-leakage protection is provided by:
b adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker
b using a specific Micrologic control unit
M
G
b using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids.
2 Schneider Electric
Switch-disconnectors p. 60
E21272
A switch-disconnector version of Compact NS circuit breakers exists for circuit

control and isolation.
All the additional functions may be combined with the basic switch-disconnector
function, including:
push
to
trip b earth-leakage protection
b motor mechanism
b ammeter, etc.
For information on other switch-disconnector ranges, see the Interpact (offering
positive contact indication and visible break) and Fupact (fuse switch) catalogues.
Service connection p. xx
E56631
Compact NS service-connection circuit breakers are specially designed for the

service-connection function:
b lead seals and locking systems
ø5...8
b tripping curves certified by utilities

b fast overload curves to limit the power supplied, etc.
Interpact INV switch-disconnectors offering visible break (see the corresponding
catalogue) can be combined with Compact NS circuit breakers to constitute
the various types of service connections and meet the needs of all installation
configurations.
push 22 DE
to STR
trip
90 %Ir test
105 50/60Hz
Im
5 alarm
Ir 4 6
.9 3
.85 .95 8 Ir Im
.8 2
.98 10
1.5
.7 xIr
1
.63
xIn
push 22 DE
to STR
trip
90 %Ir test
105 50/60Hz
Im
5 alarm
Ir 4 6
.9 3
.85 .95 8 Ir Im
.8 2
.98 10
1.5
.7 xIr
1
.63
xIn
Source-changeover systems p. 68 (see also the "Source-changeover systems" catalogue)

E32454
N R To ensure a continuous supply of power, some electrical installations are

connected to two power sources:
b a normal source
b a replacement source on hand to supply the installation when the normal source
is not available.
A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compact
or Masterpact devices avoids all risk of parallel connection of the sources during
switching.
A source-changeover system can be:
b manual with mechanical interlocking between the devices
b remote operated when an electrical interlocking function in added
b automatic when a controller is added to manage switching from one source to the
other on the basis of external parameters.
UL 489 applications
Compact NS circuit breakers also meet the requirements of applications governed
by standard UL 489 (see the corresponding catalogue).
Schneider Electric 3
...a solution for all installation
configurations
The Compact NS range now covers all Compact NS100 to 630

ratings from 80 to 3200 A:
Breaking capacity
b Compact NS80 to 1600 A, fixed, Icu at 415 V
E58549
withdrawable, front or rear connections,
manual or electrical operation.
b Compact NS1600 to 3200 A, fixed, front
connection, manual operation.
E27836
The rating plates on the front

compact panel of each device indicate
NS 250 N
Ui750V Uimp8kV
the breaking capacity
Ue Icu (N, H or L).
(V) (kA)
220/240 85
380/415 36
440 35
500 30
525 22
660/690 8
250 50
Ics = 100 % Icu
IEC 947-2 cat A

UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA
N: standard breaking
capacity
E27837
compact
NS 250 H
Ui750V Uimp8kV
Ue Icu
(V) (kA)
220/240 100
380/415 70
440 65
500 50
525 35
660/690 10
250 85
Ics = 100 % Icu

Compact NS630b to 1600
IEC 947-2 cat A
Breaking capacity
H: high breaking capacity Icu at 415 V
E58550
E27838
compact
NS 250 L
Ui750V Uimp8kV
Ue Icu .
(V) (kA)
220/240 150
380/415 150
440 130
500 70
525 50
660/690 20
250 100
Ics = 100 % Icu
.
IEC 947-2 cat A
L: very high breaking

capacity
Total discrimination
as standard
E22051

Breaking capacity
Icu at 415 V
E58551
push
to
trip
Discrimination between Compact NS circuit breakers

is total for all types of faults (overloads, high or low short-
circuits) and whatever the type of trip unit used with
the circuit breaker.
047313
041625
053100
Manual Compact NS250 Compact NS250 with motor Plug-in Compact NS250
with thermal-magnetic mechanism on base
041879
trip unit
Compact NS400 with Withdrawable Compact

electronic trip unit NS250 on chassis
E45163
E45151
Manually operated Compact NS800 Electrically operated Compact NS800

E45178
Compact NS2000 (manually operated only)
...simplified installation
Compact circuit breakers make it possible 5 frame sizes from 80 to 3200 A

to standardise switchboards for faster
053100
installation and fewer errors.
All type L Compact circuit breakers
(150 kA) are housed in the same case
045345
046751
as the type N and type H models
with the same ratings.
Compact circuit breakers up to 1600 A
can be easily installed side-by-side
in a minimum amount of space. 80 A 100 to 250 A 400 to 630 A
E45151
E45178
630 to 1600 A 1600 to 3200 A
Many connection
possibilities
Numerous connection possibilities, including front and
041650
rear connections for bare cables, cable lugs or bars,
as well as plug-in or withdrawable versions, are
available using accessories that can be rapidly added
to the circuit breaker.
Connection parts
for Compact NS
Plug-in and withdrawable

versions
042788
Plug-in and withdrawable versions for:

b fast removal or insertion of the circuit breaker
without exposure to live parts
b standby outgoing circuits ready for wiring and circuit
breaker installation at a later date
b visible break possibility.
Busways
Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A can be
installed in tap-off units of the Telemecanique Canalis
E32455
range of busbar trunking.
...optimised protection
and accurate measurements
Each Compact NS circuit breaker provides Compact NS100 to 630

different types of protection, depending on On Compact NS100 to NS250 circuit breakers, the thermal-magnetic and
electronic trip units are interchangeable and may be rapidly fitted to the circuit
the trip unit or control unit selected. breakers. It is therefore easy to change the protection of a given circuit following a
Additional measurement and indication modification in an installation.
functions are available: On Compact NS400 and NS630 circuit breakers, the electronic trip units are
b on Compact NS100 to 630, by adding an interchangeable, plug-in modules. The STR53UE trip unit offers a large number
of protection settings:
electrical auxiliary to the circuit breaker standard:
b on Compact NS630b to 3200, depending b specific indication of the different types of faults (overloads, short-circuits, etc.)
on the Micrologic control unit selected. optional:
b built-in ammeter
b earth-fault protection
b communication: transmission of all information concerning circuit-breaker
operation to an electrical distribution control, monitoring and automation system via
Digipact modules (see page 72).
048287
041625
041638
TM thermal-magnetic Voltage presence indication
trip unit module
045212
041641
Compact NS250
STR electronic trip unit Ammeter module

Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are equipped with Micrologic control
units that are interchangeable on site.
Micrologic 2.0 and 2.0 A control units offer standard protection. Micrologic 5.0 and
5.0 A control units offer selective protection that can be completed by earth-fault
protection on Micrologic 6.0 A and earth-leakage protection on Micrologic 7.0 A
control units.
The ammeter version of Micrologic control units provides current measurements.
These units are equipped with a digital display and bargraph, used in conjunction
with simple navigation buttons. Access to the desired parameters and settings
is direct and navigation between screens is intuitive. Settings are greatly simplified
by direct display on the screen.
E45151
056480
056479
Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A,

Compact NS1600 5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7.0 A
...an optimised range
A complete system of add-on modules for 16

Compact NS:
Fewer catalogue numbers means immediate
availability of parts for all solutions. 15
Trip units, control units, auxiliaries and installation
and connection accessories are the same for a given
frame size and often for a number of frame sizes (e.g.
auxiliary contacts, MN and MX voltage releases, etc.): 5
b Compact NS800 to NSA160
b Compact NS100 to NS250
b Compact NS400 to NS630 12
E24603
b Compact NS630b to 1600
b Compact 1600b to 3200.
8
7
11
9
10
13
2
2
4
3
6
14
1 Breaking unit
2 Trip units or control units
3 Vigi earth-leakage protection module
4 Insulation monitoring module
5 Voltage presence indicator
6 Ammeter module
7 MN and MX voltage releases
8 Multifunction auxiliary contact
9 Direct rotary handle
10 Extended rotary handle
11 Motor mechanism
12 Plug-in base
13 Connection of auxiliary circuits to plug-in base or withdrawable chassis
14 Connection accessories
15 Short terminal shields
16 Long terminal shields
Compact NS Functions and characteristics
Selection of a Compact NS circuit breaker Presentation 2

depends on the application requiring protection General characteristics 12
(distribution systems, motor feeders, etc.) and on
the prescribed installation conditions (see section Protection of distribution systems 14
“Installation, connection and accessories”). Overview of solutions 14
Compact NB circuit breakers up to 600 A 16
Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A 18
Compact NS circuit breakers from 630 up to 3200 A 20
TM and STR trip units for Compact NS100 to 250 22
MP and STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630 24
Micrologic control units for Compact NS630b to 3200 28
Special cases:
b single-phase and two-phase systems 34
b 1000 V systems 36
b 400 Hz applications 38
b circuit breaker selection for DC applications 40
b incoming circuit breakers in final distribution NSA160 42
Motor protection 44
Overview of solutions 44
Compact NS80H-MA 46
NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with MA magnetic trip units 47
NS100 to 250 circuit breakers with STR22ME electronic trip unit 48
NS400 to 630 circuit breakers with STR43ME electronic trip unit 50
Protection of industrial control panels 52
Circuit breaker NSC100N 53
Trip units, auxiliaries, installation enclosures 54
UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking 55
Earth-leakage protection 56
Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) for Compact NS100 to 630 57
Control and isolation 58
Compact NSA125NA and NSA160NA switch-disconnectors 60
Compact NSC100 and NS100 to 630NA switch-disconnectors 62
Compact NS630bNA to 1600NA switch-disconnectors 64
Compact NS1600b to 3200NA switch-disconnectors 66
Source-changeover systems 68
Presentation 68
Manual source-changeover systems 69
Remote-operated systems 70
Controllers 71
Communication 72
Compact NS100 to 630 72
COM option in Compact 74, 78
Compact in a communication network 76
Electrical and mechanical accessories 80
Compact NB50 and 100 80, 82
Compact NB250 to 600 81, 84
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N 88, 90
Compact NSA160 89, 90
Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 94,96
Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable version) 95, 96
Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) 114, 116
Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) 115, 116
Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fixed version) 134
Test equipment 139
Display modules 140
Installation recommendations 143
Dimensions, volumes 165
Connection 205
Electrical diagrams 221
Additional characteristics 251
Catalogue numbers 267
Functions and General characteristics
characteristics
E18567
Compliance with standards

Compact NS circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with the following:
compact b international recommendations:
NS160 H v IEC 60947-1 - general rules
Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV. v IEC 60947-2 - circuit breakers
Ue Icu v IEC 60947-3 - switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, etc.
(V) (kA) v IEC 60947-4 - contactors and motor starters
220/240 100 v IEC 60947-5.1 and following - control circuit devices and switching elements;
380/415 70
automatic control components
440 65
500/525 50
b European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the corresponding national
660/690 10 standards:
250 85 v France NF
Ics = 100% Icu v Germany VDE
cat A v U.K. BS
v Australia AS
v Italy CEI
IEC 947.2 b the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyd’s
Register of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.)
Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate:
b French standard NF C 79-130 and the recommendations issued by the CNOMO
Ui: rated insulation voltage organisation for the protection of machine tools.
Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage For U.S. UL, Canadian CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please
Icu: ultimate breaking capacity, for various values consult us.
of the rated operational voltage Ue
cat: utilisation category
Icw: rated short-time withstand current Pollution degree
Ics: service breaking capacity Compact NS circuit breakers are certified for operation in pollution-degree III
suitable for isolation
environments as defined by IEC standard 60947 (industrial environments).
Tropicalisation
Compact NS circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests prescribed by the
following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
b IEC 68-2-1 - dry cold (-55 °C)
b IEC 68-2-2 - dry heat (+85 °C)
b IEC 68-2-30 - damp heat (95 % relative humidity at 55 °C)
b IEC 68-2-52 - salt mist (severity level 2).
Environmental protection
Compact NS circuit breakers take into account important concerns for
environmental protection. Most components are recyclable and the parts of
Compact NS630b to NS3200 circuit breakers are marked as specified in applicable
standards.
Ambient temperature
b Compact NS circuit breakers may be used between -25 °C and +70 °C.
For temperatures higher than 40 °C (65 °C for circuit breakers used to protect
motor feeders), devices must be derated as indicated in the documentation.
b circuit-breakers should be put into service under normal ambient operating-
temperature conditions. Exceptionally, the circuit breaker may be put into service
when the ambient temperature is between -35 °C and -25 °C.
b the permissible storage-temperature range for Compact NS circuit breakers in
the original packing is -50 °C (1) to +85 °C.
Discrimination
As standard, the Compact NS range ensures discrimination between two circuit
breakers positioned in series in an installation.
E22037
CB1
CB2
(1) -40 °C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.
044 334
Positive contact indication

All Compact NS circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined in IEC
standard 60947-2:
b the isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position
b the operating handle cannot indicate the “OFF” position unless the contacts are
effectively open
b padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open.
Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability
of the position-indication system.
The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing:
b the mechanical reliability of the position indication system
b the absence of leakage currents
b overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections.
E18569
Installation in class II switchboards

All Compact NS circuit breakers are class II front face devices. They may be
installed through the door of class II switchboards (as per IEC standard 60664),
without downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no special
operations, even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or a
motor mechanism.
Degree of protection
As per standards IEC 60529 (IP degree of protection) and EN 50102
(IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts).
Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields
With toggle IP40 IK07
E18570
push
to
trip
E28439
With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07

standard / VDE
ON
I
push
to
trip
O
OFF
Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard

With toggle IP40 IK07
E21277
push
to
trip
With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07

E28440
standard / VDE
MCC IP435
CNOMO IP547
ON
I
push
to
trip
O
OFF
With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08

E28441
ON
I
push
to
trip
ON
O I
OFF
OFF
With motor mechanism IP40 IK07

E28442
push
to
trip
1
/auto
I
manu O ON
push
OFF
push
Functions and Protection of distribution systems
characteristics Overview of solutions
E58563
Protection of distribution systems means
E43842
protection of: G
b systems supplied by a transformer
b systems supplied by an engine
generator set
b long cables in IT and TN systems.
Power distribution
Selection of circuit breakers up to 630 A page 18
Rated current (A) 12.5 … 12.5 … 12.5 … 12.5 … 60… 250…
E20999
push
to
trip
125 100 160 250 400 630

Compact NS125E NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
053100
045345
Breaking capacity E 16
(kA rms) N 25 36 36 45 45
380/415 V H 70 70 70 70 70
L 150 150 150 150 150
Accompanying trip units up to 630 A page 22
Interchangeable thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units for NS100 to 630 and built-in
thermal-magnetic trip unit for Compact NS125E
Selection of circuit breakers from 630 to 3200 A page 20
+
Rated current (A) 250 … 320 … 400 … 500… 640…
630 800 1000 1250 1600
E43843
Compact NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600

E45151
Special case of DC systems:

TM thermal-magnetic trip units for Compact NS100 Breaking capacity N 50 50 50 50 50
to 250 and MP magnetic trip units for Compact (kA rms) H 70 70 70 70 70
NS400 and 630 may be used to protect DC 380/415 V L 150 150 150 - -
distribution systems. Rated current (A) 640 … 800 ... 1000 … 1250 …
1600 2000 2500 3200
Compact NS1600b NS2000 NS2500 NS3200
E45178
Breaking capacity N 70 70 70
(kA rms) H 85 85 85
380/415 V
Accompanying control units up to 3200 A page 28
Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to NS3200 circuit
breakers and can be changed on site.
Power distribution (cont.)
Single-phase or two-phase distribution page 34
Rated current (A) 16… 100 125… 160 160… 250
Compact NS100 1P/2P NS160 1P/2P NS250 1P
Built-in thermal-magnetic
86099
86101
trip units
Breaking capacity 1P 2P 1P 2P 1P
(kA rms) 220 V N 25 85 25 85 25
H 40 100 40 100 -
1000 V distribution page 36

Rated current (A) 60… 400
Compact NS400 1000V
Breaking capacity:
053182
10 kA rms at 1000 V
STR23SP electronic trip unit

specially designed for
1000 V applications
Incoming circuit breakers in final distribution page 42

E21000

Compact installation on NSA160
a DIN rail Breaking capacity
048016
(kA rms) 380/415 V:

E : 16 kA
N : 30 kA
Built-in trip unit
characteristics Compact NS circuit breakers
up to 630 A
045345
Compact circuit breakers

Number of poles
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fixed front connection
rear connection
plug-in (on base) front connection
rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connection
rear connection
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 °C
Compact NS250H 65 °C
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
048286
DC
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V
50/60 Hz 380/415 V
440 V
500 V
525 V
660/690 V
DC 250 V (1P)
500 V (2P in series)
Service breaking capacity lcs % Icu
Suitability for isolation
Utilisation category
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical
electrical 440 V In/2
In
Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1
Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V
480 V
600 V
Compact NS630L Electrical characteristics as per UL508
480 V
600 V
Protection
Trip units
Overload protection long time Ir (In x …)
Short-circuit protection short time lsd (Ir x …)
instantaneous Ii (In x …)
Earth-fault protection lg (In x …)
Zone selective interlocking ZSI
Add-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module
combination with Vigirex relay
Current measurements
Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
MX shunt and MN undervoltage releases
Voltage-presence indicator
Current-transformer module and ammeter module
Insulation-monitoring module
Remote communication by bus
Device-status indication
Device remote operation
Transmission of settings
Indication and identification of protection devices and alarms
Transmission of measured current values
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and interphase barriers
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D fixed, front connections 2-3P / 4P
Weight (kg) fixed, front connections 3P / 4P
(1) 2P in 3P case for type N only
Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems)
(2) specific trip units are available for operational
voltages > 525 V Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover systems
(3) operational voltage y 500 V.
NS125E NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
125 100 160 250 400 630

- 100 150 220 320 500
750 750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8 8
500 690 690 690 690 690
- 500 500 500 500 500
E N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L
25 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150
16/10 25 70 150 36 70 150 36 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
10 25 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
6 18 50 100 30 50 70 30 50 70 30 50 100 30 50 70
- 18 35 100 22 35 50 22 35 50 22 35 100 22 35 50
- 8 10 75 8 10 20 8 10 20 10 (2) 20 (2) 75 (2) 10 (2) 20 (2) 35 (2)
50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 - 85 - - 85 -
50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 - 85 - - 85 -
50 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % (3)
b b b b b b
A A A A A A
10000 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
6000 50000 40000 20000 12000 8000
6000 30000 20000 10000 6000 4000
5 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200
5 25 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
- 10 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50
- 85 85 - 85 85 - 85 85 - - - - - - -
- 25 65 - 35 65 - 35 65 - - - - - - -
- 10 10 - 10 10 - 18 18 - - - - - - -
non interchangeable TM (thermal-magnetic) STR22 (electronic) STR23 (electronic) STR53 (electronic)

12.5… 125 (A) b b b b
- - b b b
- b b b b
- - - - b
- - - - b
b b b b b
b b b b b
- - - - b
b b b
b b b
- b b
- b b
- b b
- b b b b
- b b b b
- - - - b
- - - - b
- - - - b
b b b
b b b
b b b
105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 / 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110 / 185 x 255 x 110
1.7 / 2.3 1.6 to 1.9 / 2.1 to 2.3 6.0 / 7.8
- b b
characteristics Compact NS circuit breakers
from 630 up to 3200 A

E45151
Number of poles
electric
rear connection
rear connection
65 °C (1)
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
Compact NS800H DC
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V
50/60 Hz 380/415 V
440 V
500/525 V
E45178
660/690 V
DC 250 V
500 V
Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs Value or % Icu
Short-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw 0.5 s
V AC 50/60 Hz 1s
V AC 50/60 Hz 3s
Integrated instantaneous protection kA peak ±10 %
Compact NS2000H In
Compact NS1600bN 690 V In/2
In
Pollution degree
Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1
Breaking capacity at 60 Hz (kA) 240 V
480 V
600 V
Protection and measurements
Interchangeable control units
Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x …)
Residual earth-leakage protection I∆n
Protection of the fourth pole
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltage releases MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Installation
escutcheons
Dimensions fixed devices, front connections (mm) 3P
HxWxD 4P
(1) 65 °C with vertical connections. See the temperature Weight fixed devices, front connections (kg) 3P
derating tables for other types of connections. 4P
(2) Ics : 100 % Icu for breaking capacity 440V/500V/660V Source changeover system (see section on "source changeover systems")
Ics : 75 % Icu for breaking capacity 220V/380V. Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover systems
NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600 NS1600b NS2000 NS2500 NS3200
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b
b b -
b b -
N H L N H N H
b b b b b b b
b b b b b - -
b b b b b - -
b b b b b - -
630 800 1000 1250 1600 1600 2000 2500 3200

630 800 1000 1250 1510 1550 1900 2500 2970
750 750 750
8 8 8
690 690 690
500 500 500
N H L N H N H
50 70 150 50 70 85 125
50 70 150 50 70 70 85
50 65 130 50 65 65 85
40 50 100 40 50 65 -
30 42 25 30 42 65 -
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
75 % 50 % 100 % 75 % 50 % 100 % (2) 75 %
25 25 10 25 25 - -
17 17 7 17 17 - -
- - - - - 32 32
55 55 130 130
b b b
B B A B B B B
10000 10000 5000
6000 5000 5000 3000
5000 4000 2000 2000
4000 3000 2000 2000
2000 2000 1000 1000
III III III
N H L N H N H
50 65 125 50 65 85 125
35 50 100 35 50 65 85
25 50 - 25 50 50 -
Micrologic 2.0 Micrologic 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A Micrologic 5.0 A Micrologic 6.0 A Micrologic 7.0 A
b b b b b b
- b - b b b
b b b b b b
- - - - b -
- - - - - b
- - b b b b
b b b b b b
- - b b b b
b b
b b
b b
b b b b b b
b b b b - -
- - b b b b
- - b b b b
- - b b b b
b -
b -
b b
327 x 210 x 147 350 x 420 x 160
327 x 280 x 147 350 x 535 x 160
14 24
18 36
characteristics TM and STR trip units
for Compact NS100 to 250
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers, 13 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 200 250
E23160
types N, H and L, may be equipped with TM-D
either a TM thermal-magnetic trip unit
or an STR22 electronic trip unit. STR22SE
A mechanical mismatch-protection system TM-G
avoids breaker and trip unit mismatches.
STR22GE
TM-D
TM-G
Standard protection Protection of systems Protection of DC

supplied by generators. distribution systems
Protection of long
cables
TM thermal-magnetic trip units

E58564
t 1 2
1
E19528
Ir Im TM 250 D
10 5
250A / 40°C
9 6
1 .8 8 7
2 .9
x 250A x 250A Ir Im
0 Ir Im I
1 overload protection threshold

Protection
2 short-circuit protection pick-up The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
Overload protection
Thermal protection with an adjustable threshold.
Short-circuit protection
Magnetic protection with a fixed or adjustable pick-up, depending on the rating.
On four-pole circuit breakers, the trip units can be of the:
4P 3d type (neutral unprotected),
4P 3d + N/2 type (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d type (neutral protection at In).
TM thermal-magnetic trip units TM16D to 250D TM16G to 63G

Ratings (A) In at 40 °C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 16 25 40 63
Circuit breaker Compact NS125 E b b b b b b b b b - - - b b b b
Compact NS100 b b b b b b b b - - - - b b b b
Compact NS160 b b b b b b b b b b - - b b b b
Compact NS250 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Overload protection (thermal)
Current setting (A) Ir adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In
Short-circuit protection (magnetic)
Current setting (A) Im fixed adjustable fixed
Compact NS100 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 63 80 80 125
Compact NS160/250 190 300 400 500 500 500 1000 1250 1250 1250 5 to 10 x In 63 80 80 125
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 56 56 63 0.5 x Ir
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir
STR22 electronic trip units
t
E58565
1 7 3 6
1
E24096
In=100A STR 22 SE alarm %Ir
90
105
Io Ir Im
3 .8 .9 .9 .93 5 6
.7 1 .88 .95 4 7 + -
4 .63 .85 .98 3 8
5 .5 .8 1 2 10
Ir Im x In x Io x Ir test
0 Ir Im I
Protection
1 long-time threshold (overload protection)
2 long-time tripping delay The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) Overload protection
4 short-time tripping delay True rms long-time protection with an adjustable threshold.
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection)
6 test connector
7 percent load indication Short-time and instantaneous protection:
b short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay
b instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up.
E58711
4P 4d On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch

to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
(neutral protection at In).
Indications
A LED on the front indicates the percent load:
Protection of the fourth pole b ON - load is > 90 % of Ir setting
b flashing - load is > 105 % of Ir setting.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.
STR electronic trip units STR22SE STR22GE

Ratings (A) In 20 to 70 °C (1) 40 80 100 160 250 (1) 40 100 160 250 (1)
Circuit breaker Compact NS100 N/H/L b - b - - b b - -
Compact NS160 N/H/L b b b b - b b b -
Compact NS250 N/H/L b b b b b b b b b
Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir = In x … 0.4...1 0.4...1
48 settings 48 settings
Time delay (s) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 12…15
(min.…max.) at 6 x Ir 5...7.5 -
at 7.2 x Ir 3.2...5.0 -
Short-circuit protection (Short Time)
Pick-up (A) Im = Ir x … 2...10 2...10
Accuracy ±15 % 8 settings 8 settings
Time delay (ms) fixed fixed
max. resettable time y 40 y 40
max. break time y 60 y 60
Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)
Pick-up (A) Ii fixed u 11 x In fixed u 11 x In
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection -
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 0.5 x Ir -
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir -
(1) If the STR22SE and STR22GE 250 A trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the
circuit breaker. The overload protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60 °C or 0.9 at 70 °C.
Setting example
E25979
What is the overload-protection threshold of a Io Ir

Compact NS250 circuit breaker equipped with an .8 .9 .9 .93
.7 1 .88 .95
STR22SE 160 A trip unit set to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8 ? .63 .85 .98
Answer: .5 .8 1
In x Io x Ir = 160 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 64 A. x In x Io
characteristics MP and STR trip units
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, 60 250 400 500 630
E23161
types N, H and L, 3-pole and 4-pole, may STR23SE / STR53UE
be equipped with any of the STR23SE, STR23SE / STR53UE
STR23SV, STR53UE and STR53SV
electronic trip units. STR23SV / STR53SV
The STR53UE and STR53SV trip units MP
offer a wider range of settings and the
STR53UE offers a number of optional Standard protection Protection of systems supplied by
with selectivity generators. Protection of long cables
protection, measurement and
Protection of DC
communications functions. distribution systems
Protection of systems U > 525 V
For DC applications, the Compact NS400H
and 630H circuit breakers are equipped Selection of the trip unit depends on the type of distribution system protected and
with a built-in MP magnetic trip unit. the operational voltage of the circuit breaker.
Protection for all types of circuits, from 60 to 630 A, is possible with only four trip-
unit catalogue numbers, whatever the circuit-breaker operational voltage:
b U y 525 V: STR23SE or STR53UE
b U > 525 V: STR23SV or STR53SV.
Trip units do not have a predefined rating. The tripping threshold depends on the
circuit breaker rating and the LT (long time) current setting.
For example, for an STR23SE trip unit set to the maximum value, the tripping
threshold is:
v 250 A, when installed on a Compact NS400 250 A
v 630 A, when installed on a Compact NS630.
STR23SE (U y 525 V) and STR23SV (U > 525 V)

electronic trip units
t 6 1 7 3
E21003
2 STR 23 SE alarm 90
105 %Ir
E24094
Io Ir Isd
.8 .9 .9 .93 5 6
3 .7 1 .88 .95 4 7
.63 .85 .98 3 8
4 .8 1 2 10
.5
5 x In x Io x Ir
Ir Isd
+ -
0 Ir Im I test

2 long-time tripping delay
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection)
4 short-time tripping delay Protection
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
6 test connector Overload protection
7 percent load indication Long-time protection with an adjustable threshold and fixed tripping delay:
b Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1)
b Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1).
Short-time and instantaneous protection:
b short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch
to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
(neutral protection at In).
Indications
b ON - load is > 90 % of Ir setting
b flashing - load is > 105 % of Ir setting.
Test
STR53UE (U y 525 V) and STR53SV (U > 525 V)
t
E21004
8 1 2 3 4 5 6 (*) 9 7 (*)
2 STR 53 UE %Ir >Ir >Isd >Ig test fault
E33944
Io Ir Isd Ii Ig µP
.8 .9 .9 .93 4 5 4 6 .5 .6
.7 .88 .95 3 .4
3 1 3 6 8 .7 > Ir
.6 .85 .98 2 8 2 10 .3 .8 A
6 4 .5 1 .8 1 1.5 10 1.5 11 .2 1 > Im tr
x In x Io x Ir x In x In
7 5 tr tsd tg
tsd
> Ih
test 8 16 .3 .3 .4 .4 In I1 I2 I3
4 (s).2 (s) .3
+ - .2
.1
.3
.2
Ir Isd li
2 .1 .2
0 Ir Isd Ii I 0,5 16 0 0 .1 .1
(s) @ 6 Ir on I2t off on I2t off

2 long-time tripping delay
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection)
4 short-time tripping delay
Protection
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
6 optional earth-fault pick-up Overload protection
7 optional earth-fault tripping delay Long-time protection with adjustable threshold and tripping delay:
8 test connector b Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1)
9 battery and lamp test pushbutton
b Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1).
Earth-fault protection (T) (see the “Options for b short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and tripping delay,
the STR53UE electronic trip unit” section on the with or without constant I2t
following pages). b instantaneous protection with adjustable pick-up.
With the earth-fault option (T) on the STR53UE Protection of the fourth pole
electronic trip unit, an external neutral sensor can On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch
be installed (situation for a three-pole circuit to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
breaker in a distribution system with a neutral). (neutral protection at In).
Available ratings of external neutral sensors: 150,
250, 400, 630 A.
Overload LED (%Ir)
b when ON, the load is > 90 % of Ir setting
b when flashing, the load is > 105 % of Ir setting.
Fault indications
A LED signals the type of fault:
b overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (> Ir)
b short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (> Isd)
b earth fault (if earth-fault protection option installed) (> Ig)
b microprocessor malfunction:
v both (> Ig) and (> Isd) LEDs ON
v (> Ig) LED ON (if earth-fault protection option (T) installed).
Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. The LED
indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten minutes to conserve
battery power. The information is however stored in memory and the LED can be
turned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton. The LED
automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit breaker is reset.
Test
The test pushbutton tests the battery and the (%Ir), (> Ir), (> Isd) and (> Ig) LEDs.
Self monitoring
The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature
is detected.
Options
Four options are available:
b earth-fault protection T
b ammeter I
b zone selective interlocking ZSI
b communications option COM.
characteristics MP and STR trip units
for Compact NS400 to 630 (cont.)
Trip units STR23SE (U y 525V) STR53UE (U y 525V)

STR23SV (U > 525V) STR53SV (U > 525V)
Ratings (A) In 20 to 70 °C (1) 150 250 400 630 150 250 400 630
Circuit breaker Compact NS400 N/H/L b b b - b b b -
Compact NS630 N/H/L - - - b - - - b
Overload protection (Long time)
Current setting Ir = In x … 0.4...1 0.4...1
adjustable, 48 settings adjustable, 48 settings
Time delay (s) fixed adjustable
(min.…max.) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 8...15 34...50 69...100 138...200 277...400
at 6 x Ir 5...7.5 0.4...0.5 1.5...2 3...4 6...8 12...16
at 7.2 Ir 3.2...5.0 0.2...0.74 1...1.4 2...2.8 4...5.5 8.2...11
Short-circuit protection (Short time)
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 2...10 1.5...10
accuracy ±15 % adjustable, 8 settings adjustable, 8 settings
Time delay (ms) fixed adjustable, 4 settings + "constant I2t" option
max. resettable time y 40 y 15 y 60 y 140 y 230
max. break time y 60 y 60 y 140 y 230 y 350
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x … 11 1.5...11
fixed adjustable, 8 settings
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 0.5 x Ir 0.5 x Ir
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir
Options
Indication of fault type - b (standard)
Zone selective interlocking ZSI - b (2)
Communications COM - b (2)
Built-in ammeter I - b (2)
Earth-fault protection T - b (2)
(1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. The overload
protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60 °C or 0.9 at 70 °C for the Compact NS400, and 0.95 at 50 °C, 0.9 at 60 °C or 0.85 at 70 °C for the Compact NS630.
(2) This option is not available for the STR53SV trip unit.
Setting example
E25979
Io Ir
What is the overload-protection threshold of a .8 .9 .9 .93
.7 1 .88 .95
Compact NS400 circuit breaker equipped with .63 .85 .98
an STR23SE (or STR23SV) trip unit set .5 .8 1
to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8 ?
x In x Io
Answer.
In x Io x Ir = 400 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 160 A.
The identical trip unit, with identical settings but
installed on a Compact NS630 circuit breaker, will
have an overload-protection threshold of:
630 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 250 A.
Possible Options for the STR53UE electronic trip unit
combinations:
bI Earth-fault protection (T)
bT Type Residual
bI+T Pick-up Ig = In x … 0.2 to 1
b I + COM Accuracy ±15 % adjustable, 8 settings
b I + T + COM Time delay adjustable, 4 settings
b ZSI “constant I2t” function max. resettable time 60 140 230 350
b ZSI + I max. break time y 140 y 230 y 350 y 500
b ZSI + T
b ZSI + I + T Ammeter (I)
b ZSI +I + COM A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest
b ZSI + I + T + COM load. The value of each current (I1, I2, I3, Ineutral) may be successively displayed
by pressing a scroll button.
LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.
Ammeter display limits:
b minimum current u 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed
b maximum current y 10 x In.
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)

A number of circuit breakers are interconnected one after another by a pilot wire.
In the event of a short-time or earth fault:
b if a given STR53UE trip unit detects the fault, it informs the upstream circuit
breaker, which applies the set time delay
b if the STR53UE trip unit does not detect the fault, the upstream circuit breaker
trips after its shortest time delay.
In this manner, the fault is cleared rapidly by the nearest circuit breaker.
The thermal stresses on the circuits are minimised and time discrimination is
maintained throughout the installation.
The STR53UE trip unit can handle only the downstream end of a zone selective
interlocking function. Consequently, the ZSI option cannot be implemented
between two Compact NS circuit breakers.
Opto-electronic outputs
Using opto-transistors, these outputs ensure total isolation between the internal
circuits of the trip unit and the circuits wired by the user.
Communications option (COM)

This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules.
Transmitted data:
b settings
b phase and neutral currents (rms values)
b highest current of the three phases
b overload-condition alarm
b cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
MP DC trip units
E26028
Im(A)
30005000
4400
2500
3800 3500
5700
2000 4000
In Im
Magnetic trip units for Compact NS400/630 three-pole, type H circuit breakers.
These trip units are specifically designed to protect DC distribution systems.
They are not interchangeable. The circuit breaker and trip unit are supplied
fully assembled.
Built-in trip units MP1 MP2 MP3
Circuit breaker Compact NS400H b b -
Compact NS630H b b b
Pick-up (A) Im adjustable adjustable adjustable
800...1600 1250...2500 2000...4000
characteristics Micrologic control units
for Compact NS630b to 3200
Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0 control units protect Protection

power circuits. Micrologic 5.0 offers time Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials.
discrimination for short-circuits as well. Overload protection
True rms long-time protection.
Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping.
Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different
long-time rating plug.
E46026A
Micrologic 5.0 Overload protection can be cancelled using a specific LT rating plug "Off".
Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection.
Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay.
Neutral protection
On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 In (4P 3d + N/2) or
neutral protection at In (4P 4d).
Indications
Overload indication by alarm LED on the front; the LED goes on when the current
exceeds the long-time trip threshold.
Test
long time
2
Ir tr alarm
1 .7
.8
.9 (s) 4
8
12 5
.6 .95 2 16
.5 .98 1 20
.4 1 .5 24
x In @ 6 Ir
short time instantaneous

Isd tsd Ii
3 3
4
5 (s) .4 .4 .3 3
4
5 4
2.5 6 .3 .2 2.5 6
2 8 .2 .1 2 8
1.5 10 .1 2
0 1.5 10
x Ir on I t off x In
setting delay
1 long-time threshold and tripping delay

2 overload alarm (LED)
3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay
4 instantaneous pick-up
5 fixing screw for long-time rating plug
6 test connector
Note.
Micrologic control units are equipped with a transparent lead-
seal cover as standard.
Protection Micrologic 2.0
Long time
t
E46022
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
Ir
tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug
Time setting (s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
accuracy: 0 to -20 % tr at 6 x Ir 0.7 (1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 tr
accuracy: 0 to -20 % tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.7 (2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Isd
Instantaneous 0 I
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
accuracy: ±10 %
Time delay max resettable time: 20 ms; max break time: 80 ms
Protection Micrologic 5.0

Long time Micrologic 5.0
t
E46023
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Ir
Time setting (s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
tr
accuracy: 0 to -20 % tr at 6 x Ir 0.7 (1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy: 0 to -20 % tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.7 (2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 Isd
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping tsd
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Ii
Short time
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 0 I
accuracy: ±10 %
Time setting (s) settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time delay (ms) at 10 Ir tsd (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
tsd (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x … 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
accuracy: ±10 %
characteristics Micrologic A control units
for Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)
Micrologic A control units protect power Protection

circuits. They also offer measurements, Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials.
display, communication and current Overload protection
True rms long-time protection.
maximeters. Version 6 provides earth-fault Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping.
protection, version 7 provides earth- Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different
leakage protection. long-time rating plug.
Overload protection can be cancelled using a specific LT rating plug "Off".
E46028
Micrologic 6.0 A Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection.

Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay.
9
Earth-fault protection
10 Residual or source ground return earth fault protection.
Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for delay.
∆t= I∆n=
tsd= tr= MAX Residual earth-leakage protection (Vigi).
Isd= s
Ii= Ir= Operation without an external power supply.
kA
Ig=
11 q Protected against nuisance tripping.
tg=
kDC-component withstand class A up to 10 A.
Neutral protection
On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 In (4P 3d + N/2),
100 % neutral protection at In (4P 4d).
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)
A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of control units to
12
40 % provide total discrimination for short-time and earth-fault protection, without a delay
before tripping.
13
Overload alarm
A red alarm LED goes on when the current exceeds the long-time trip threshold.
menu
"Ammeter" measurements
long time
Ir tr 8
alarm 2 Micrologic A control units measure the true (rms) value of currents.
.8 (s) 4
.7 .9
.6 .95 2
12
16
A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax) or
1 7
.5 .98 1 20 displays the I1, I2, I3, IN, Ig,I∆n, stored-current (maximeter) and setting values by
.4 1 .5 24
x In @ 6 Ir successively pressing the navigation button. The load on each phase is indicated
Isd
short time
tsd Ii
instantaneous continuously by bargraphs.
3
4
5 (s) .4 .4 .3 6 8 10 The optional external power supply makes it possible to display currents < 20% In.
3 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12 4
2 8 .2 .1 3 15
1.5 10 .1 2 0 2 off
x Ir on I t off x In
setting delay
test
Communication option
Ig tg 6 In conjunction with the COM communication option, the control unit transmits the
D
E
F (s) .4 .4 .3
5 C G .3 .2 following:
B H .2 .1 8
A J .1 2
0 b settings
on I t off
ground fault b all “ammeter” measurements
b tripping causes
b maximeter readings.
1 long-time threshold and tripping delay Fault indications

2 overload alarm (LED) LEDs indicate the type of fault:
3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay b overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (Ir)
4 instantaneous pick-up
b short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (Isd)
5 earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay
6 earth-leakage or earth-fault test button b earth fault or earth leakage (Ig or I∆n)
7 long-time rating plug screw b microprocessor malfunction (Ap).
8 test connector Battery power
9 lamp test, reset and battery test The fault indication LEDs remain on until the test/reset button is pressed. Under
10 indication of tripping cause
normal operating conditions, the battery supplying the LEDs has a service life of
11 digital display
12 three-phase bargraph and ammeter approximately 10 years.
13 navigation buttons
Test
front to check circuit-breaker operation. For Micrologic 6.0 A and 7.0 A control units,
the operation of earth-fault or earth-leakage protection can be checked by pressing
the test button located above the test connector.
Note.
Micrologic A control units come with a transparent lead-seal
cover as standard.
Protection Micrologic 2.0 A
Long time
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 t
E46022
tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug Ir
Time setting (s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy: 0 to -20 % tr at 6 x Ir 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
tr
accuracy: 0 to -20 % tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Isd
Instantaneous
0 I
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
accuracy: ±10 %
menu
Ammeter Micrologic 2.0 A
Continuous current measurements
Display from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN
accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I > 20 % In)
Maximeters I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max
Protection Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A

Long time Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 t
E46023
Ir
Time setting (s) 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 tr
accuracy: 0 to -20 % tr at 6 x Ir 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy: 0 to -20 % tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 Isd
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping tsd
(1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 %
Ii
Short time
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 0 I
accuracy: ±10 %
I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time delay (ms) at 10 Ir tsd (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
tsd (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x … 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
accuracy: ±10 %
Time delay max resettable time: 20 ms ; max break time: 50 ms
Earth fault Micrologic 6.0 A
t
E46024
Pick up (A) Ig = In x … A B C D E F G H J 2
accuracy: ±10 % In y 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 I t on
Ig
400 A < In y 1200 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 2
In > 1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200 I t off
tg
I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Time delay (ms) tg (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350 0 I
at In or 1200 A tg (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Residual earth leakage (Vigi) Micrologic 7.0 A
I∆n t
E46243
Sensitivity (A) 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 I∆n

accuracy: 0 to -20 %
Time delay (ms) settings 60 140 230 350 800 ∆t
∆t (max resettable time) 60 140 230 350 800
∆t (max break time) 140 200 320 500 1000 0 I
menu
Ammeter Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A

Continuous current measurements
Display from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN Ig I∆n
accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I > 20 % In)
Maximeters I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max Ig max I∆n max
Note.
All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source.
The test / reset button resets maximeters, clears the tripping indication and tests the battery.
characteristics Micrologic A control units
for Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)
Accessories for Micrologic control units

External sensors
E47477
External sensor for earth-fault protection

The sensor is used with 3P circuit breakers and the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit.
It is installed on the neutral conductor for residual type earth-fault protection.
The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit
breaker:
b NS630b to NS1600 - 400/1600 CT
b NS1600b to NS3200 - 1000/4000 CT.
External sensor (CT)
Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection
The sensor is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) to detect the zero-
phase sequence current required for the earth-leakage protection.
056467
Rectangular sensors are available in two sizes.

Inside dimensions (mm)
b 280 x 115 up to 1600 A
b 470 x 160 up to 3200 A.
External sensor for source ground return protection
The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to
earth and connects to the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit to provide the source ground
return (SGR) protection.
External sensor for source
ground return protection
Long-time rating plug

Four interchangeable plugs may be used to limit the long-time threshold setting
range for higher accuracy.
As standard, control units are equipped with the 0.4 to 1 plug.
056412
Setting ranges
Standard Ir = In x… 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
Low-setting option Ir = In x… 0.4 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.8
High-setting option Ir = In x… 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.92 0.95 0.98 1
Off plug no long-time protection - Ir = In for Isd settings
External power-supply module

Used in conjunction with the Micrologic A control units, this module maintains three
functions when the circuit breaker is OFF or the current is less than 20 % In:
025173
b display of measurements
b screen backlighting
b operation of maximeters.
Characteristics:
b power supply:
v 110/130, 200/240, 380/415 V AC (+10 % -15 %), consumption 10 VA
v 24/30, 48/60, 100/125 V DC (+20 % -20 %), consumption 10 W
b output voltage: 24 V DC; power delivered: 5 W / 5 VA
b ripple < 5 %
b class 2 isolation.
056429
Spare parts for Micrologic control units

Lead-seal cover for Micrologic A
A transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the adjustment dials.
When the cover is closed, it is still possible to access:
b the test connector
b the test button for the earth-fault and earth-leakage protection function.
Spare battery
A battery supplies power to the LEDs identifying the tripping causes. Battery
service life is approximately ten years.
Lead-seal cover for
Micrologic A A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition.
The battery may be replaced on site when discharged.
characteristics Single-phase and two-phase
systems
86099

Number of poles
electric
rear connection
withdrawable front connection
rear connection
Compact NS160H single-pole DC
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220 V
86101
50/60 Hz 277 V
380/415 V
440 V
500 V
525 V
660/690 V
DC 250 V (1P)
500 V (2P)
Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs % Icu
In
Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1
V AC 50/60 Hz 277 V
Compact NS100N two-pole
480 V
600 V
Type of trip units
Ratings In
Overload protection (thermal) long time Ir
threshold
Short-circuit protection (magnetic) instantaneous lm
pickup
Indication contacts
Voltages releases MX shunt release
Device status indication via communicating auxiliary contacts
Installation
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) WxHxD
Weight (kg)
Source changeover system
Interlocking systems
NS100 NS160 NS250
1 2 1 2 1
b b b b b
- - - - -
- - - - -
b b b b b
b b b b b
- - - - -
- - - - -
100 100 160 160 250

750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8
277 690 277 690 277
250 500 250 500 250
N H N H N H N H N
25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 25
25 40 - - 25 40 - - 25
- - 25 70 - - 36 70 -
- - 25 65 - - 35 65 -
- - 18 50 - - 30 50 -
- - 18 35 - - 22 35 -
- - 8 10 - - 8 10 -
25 40 50 85 25 40 50 85 25
- - 50 85 - - 50 85 -
100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %
b b b b b
A A A A A
20000 20000 20000 20000 10000
20000 20000 20000 20000 10000
10000 10000 10000 10000 5000
N H N H N H N H N
25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 25
25 40 - - 25 40 - - 25
- - 25 65 - - 25 65 -
- - 10 35 - - 10 35 -
built-in thermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic

16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250
fixed fixed fixed
16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250
fixed fixed fixed
190 300 300 300 500 500 500 640 800 1000 1250 850 850 850
- - -
b b b
- b - b -
- b - b -
- b - b -
- b - b -
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
35 x 161 x 86 70 x 161 x 86 35 x 161 x 86 70 x 161 x 86 35 x 161 x 86
0.7 1.2 0.7 1.2 0.7
- - - - -
characteristics 1000 V systems
053182

Number of poles
Rating of sensors (A)
electric
rear connection
rear connection
rear connection
Electrical characteristics
Short-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw 0.5 s
1000 V Compact NS400
V AC 50/60 Hz 1s
For ratings above 400 A, electrical 1000 V In/2
see the Masterpact In
catalogue. Pollution degree
Interchangeable trip units
Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x …)
Residual earth-leakage protection I∆n
Add-on earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication contacts
Installation
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) fixed 3P
WxHxD 4P
Weight (kg) fixed 3P
4P
Interlocking systems
NS400 1000V For ratings above 400 A, see the Masterpact catalogue
3
150, 250, 400
b
b
b
b
consult us
consult us
consult us
consult us
consult us
1150
10
100 %
150, 250, 400

1250
8
1000
10
100 %
b
standardised
standardised
A
15000
4000
2000
III
STR23SP
b
b
b
-
b
-
-
b
-
b
b
b
b
b
-
-
-
b
b
b
480 x 140 x 110
-
13
-
consult us
characteristics 400 Hz applications
Tripping thresholds
The 400 Hz current settings are obtained by multiplying the 50 Hz values by the
following coefficient:
b K1 for thermal trip units;
b K2 for magnetic trip units.
On adjustable trip units, these adaptation coefficients are independent of the unit
adjustment knob position.
Thermal trip units
The current settings are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K1 < 1).
Magnetic trip units
The current settings are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K2 > 1).
Adjustable trip units should be set to minimum, or use Compact circuit breakers
equipped with low magnetic trip units
(type G).
Electronic trip units
The use of electronics offers the advantage of greater operating stability when the
frequency is varied. However, the devices are still subjected to frequency related
temperature effects which may sometimes pose restrictions on their use.
Column K1 of the table gives the maximum permissible current to be used for the
current setting (knob position).
Thermal-magnetic trip units

Circuit breaker Trip unit Thermal setting K1 Magnetic K2
at 40 °C setting
NS100N TM16G 16 0.95 63 1.6
TM25G 25 0.95 80 1.6
TM40G 40 0.95 80 1.6
TM63G 63 0.95 125 1.6
NS250N TM16D 16 0.95 240 1.6
TM25D 25 0.95 300 1.6
TM40D 40 0.95 500 1.6
TM63D 63 0.95 500 1.6
TM80D 80 0.9 650 1.6
TM100D 100 0.9 800 1.6
TM125D 125 0.9 1000 1.6
TM160D 160 0.9 1250 1.6
TM200D 200 0.9 1000 (1) 1.6
TM250D 250 0.9 1250 (1) 1.6
(1) for TM200D and TM250D, Im must be set to its maximum
Electronic trip units

Compact adaptation coefficients
Circuit breaker Trip unit Rating Long-time Short-time K2
Ir at 50 Hz Ir maxi Irm at 50 Hz
(A at 40 °C) K1 (A)
NS100N STR22SE 40...100 0.4 to 1 2 to 10 Ir 1
NS250N STR22SE 100...250 0.4 to 0.9 2 to 10 Ir 1
NS400N STR23SE 400 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS630N STR23SE 630 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS400N STR53SE 400 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS630N STR53SE 630 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
C801N STR25DE 800 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
STR35SE/GE 800 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
C1001N STR25DE 1000 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
STR35SE/GE 1000 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
C1251N STR25DE 1250 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
STR35SE/GE 1250 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
Breaking capacity of Compact NS and
Compact circuit breakers at 400 Hz
At 440 V, 400 Hz
Circuit breaker Breaking capacity
NS100N 12 kA
NS250N 4,5 kA
NS400N 10 kA
NS630N 10 kA
C801N 25 kA
C1001N 25 kA
C1251N 25 kA
E22347
R MN or MX auxiliary releases
MN/MX For Compact NS100-630
U volt For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems, only 125 V DC rated releases can be
125 V CC
400 Hz
used. The release must be supplied by the 400 Hz system via a rectifier bridge (to
be selected from the table below) and an additional resistor with characteristics
Connection depending on the system voltage and the type of circuit breaker.
U (V) 400 Hz Rectifier Additional resistor
220/240 V Thomson 110 BHz or 4.2 kΩ-5 W
General Instrument W06 or
Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3
380/420 V Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3 10.7 kΩ-10 W
Note : other models of rectifier bridges can be used if their characteristics are at least
equivalent to those stated above.
For Compact C801-1251

The following auxiliary releases are designed to operate at 400 Hz.
U (V) 400 Hz Catalogue number
MN 110/130 V 44925
MN 208/250 V 44926
MN 380/415 V 44932
MX 380/415 V 44914
For Compact NS630b-3200

The standard auxiliary releases can be used at 400 Hz, up to an ambiant
temperature of 55 °C.
characteristics Circuit breaker selection for DC
applications
Selection criteria
The selection of the type of circuit breaker most suitable for protection of a
DC installation depends mainly on the following criteria:
b the rated current, which determines the rating of the equipment
b the rated voltage, which determines the number of poles in series necessary for
breaking
b the maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation, which determines
the breaking capacity
b the type of network (see below).
Type of system Earthed systems Insulated systems

one polarity of the DC supply is a centre point of the DC supply is
earthed earthed
Diagrams i i i
E22350
E22348
E22349
a a a
and various
cases of faults + + +
U/2
U R + R U R
– B – U/2 B – B
A A A
b C b b
C C
Fault effect fault A max. Isc Isc close to max. Isc no effect
the positive polarity the positive polarity is the only
is the only one involved one involved, voltage U/2
fault B max. Isc max. Isc max. Isc
both polarities are involved both polarities are involved both polarities are involved
fault C no effect same as fault A but this is the no effect
negative polarity which is involved
Most unfavorable case fault A faults A and C fault B
Distribution of the the poles required to perform on each polarity there must be the the poles required to perform
breaking poles the break are in series number of poles required to perform the break are shared between
on the positive polarity the break of max. Isc at U/2 the 2 polarities
E79370
240 V DC Calculation the short-circuit current (Isc) across the terminals of a battery
300 A When a short-circuit occurs across its terminals, a battery discharges a current
Isc 500 Ah given by Ohm's law:
Ri = 0.5 mΩ/cell
Vb
Isc =
Ri
where Vb = the maximum discharge voltage (battery 100 % charged).
and Ri = the internal resistance equivalent to the sum of the cell resistances (figure
generally given by the manufacturer according to the capacity of the battery).
Example
What is the short-circuit current at the terminals of a standing battery with the
following characteristics:
b capacity: 500 Ah
b max. discharge voltage: 240 V
(110 cells of 2.2 V)
b discharge current: 300 A
b autonomy: 1/2 hour
b internal resistance: 0.5 mΩ per cell.
Ri = 110 x 0.5 10-3 = 55 10-3
240
Isc = = 4.4kA
55 10−3
As the above calculation shows, the short-circuit current is relatively weak.
Note: If the internal resistance is not known, the following approximate formula can be used:
Isc = kC, where C is the capacity of the battery expressed in Ampere-hours, and k is a
coefficient close to 10 but in any case always lower than 20.
E79371
Example 1
+
125 V = Determine the protection required for a 80 A feeder on a 125 V DC network with an
- earthed negative pole and an Isc of 15 kA.
The table below indicates that a NC100H circuit breaker (30 kA, 2P, 125 V) should
NC100 H be used.
3P
80 A The table opposite indicates that both circuit breaker poles should be fitted on the
positive pole of the network.
load An additional circuit breaker pole can be fitted on the negative pole of the network
for isolation purposes.
E79372
Example 2
+
250 V = Determine the protection required for a 100 A feeder on a 250 V DC network with
- an earthed middle point and an Isc of 15 kA.
Each pole will be exposed to a maximum of U/2 = 125 V.
NC100 H The table below indicates that NC100H (30 kA, 2P, 125 V), NS100N (50 kA, 1P,
4P 125 V) or NS160N (50 kA, 1P, 125 V) circuit breakers should be used.
100 A
The table opposite indicates that both circuit breaker poles must take part in the
load breaking at a voltage of 125 V.
E79373
Example 3
+
250 V = Determine the protection required for a 400 A feeder on an unearthed 250 V DC
- network with an Isc of 35 kA.
The table above indicates that NS400H circuit breakers (85 kA, 1P, 250 V) should
NS400H be used. At least 2 poles must take part in breaking.
2P The table opposite indicates that the half the number of circuit breaker poles
400 A
required for breaking should be fitted on the positive pole of the network and the
load other half on the negative pole.
selection table of DC circuit breakers

Type Rated current (A) Breaking capacity (kA) (L/R y 0.015 s) Protection against Protection against
and (and number of poles required to perform the break) overloads (thermal) short-circuits (magnetic)
trip units 24/48 V 125 V 250 V 500 V 750 V
NS100N 16-25-40-63-80-100 50 (1P) 50 (1P) 50 (1P) 50 (2P) same as for trip units
NS100H 16-25-40-63-80-100 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (2P) used on AC systems
NS100L 16-25-40-63-80-100 100 (1P) 100 (1P) 100 (1P) 100 (2P)
NS160N 80-100-125-160 50 (1P) 50 (1P) 50 (1P) 50 (2P)
NS160H 80-100-125-160 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (2P)
NS160L 80-100-125-160 100 (1P) 100 (1P) 100 (1P) 100 (2P)
NS250N 160-200-250 50 (1P) 50 (1P) 50 (1P) 50 (2P)
NS250H 160-200-250 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (2P)
NS250L 160-200-250 100 (1P) 100 (1P) 100 (1P) 100 (2P)
NS400H MP1/MP2/MP3 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (2P) no thermal protection: specially designed for DC
NS630H MP1/MP2/MP3 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (1P) 85 (2P) an external relay
C1251N-DC P21/P41-1250 50 (1P) 50 (1P) 50 (2P) 50 (3P) 25 (3P) must be provided
characteristics Incoming circuit breakers in final
distribution
These are incoming circuit breakers, Compact circuit breakers NSA160

specially designed to operate upstream Number of poles 3, 4
of Multi 9 modular circuit breakers. Control manual (toggle, b
direct or extended rotary handle) b
Features include: electric -
b reinforced breaking capacity at 380/415 V, Connections fixed front connection b
by cascading up to 25 kA rear connection -
withdrawable front connection -
b easy installation in Pragma and Prisma G rear connection -
enclosures: Mounting on DIN rail b
v standard 45 mm front cut-out Front-panel cut-out height 45 mm
v circuit breaker clips onto a DIN rail Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 °C 160
v reduced depth (82.5 mm). Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 500
A switch-disconnector version is also Rated impulse withstand volt. (kV) Uimp 8
available (NSA125NA and NSA160NA). Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 500
DC 250
Type of circuit breaker E N
048016
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 220 / 240 V 25 70

(kA rms) 50/60 380 / 415 V 16 36
Hz 440 V 10 18
DC 125 V 5 10
250 V (2P) 5 10
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 50 % 100 %
Utilisation category A
Suitability for isolation b
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical 10000
electrical (In - 440 V) 5000
Protection
Built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit
Compact NSA160 Ratings In 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Thermal overload protection Ir fixed threshold
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Magnetic short-circuit fixed pick-up
protection lm 600 600 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1250 1250 1250
Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi module
protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts 1 OF + 1 SD
Voltage releases MN or MX
Installation and connections
Connections terminals 1.5 to 70 mm2 cables
Accessories terminal shields b
depth adjuster b
Dimensions (mm) Compact 3-poles 90 x 120 x 82.5
WxHxD 4-poles 120 x 120 x 82.5
Vigicompact 3-poles 210 x 120 x 82.5
4-poles 240 x 120 x 82.5
Weight (kg) Compact 3-poles 1.1
4-poles 1.4
Vigicompact 3-poles 2.6
4-poles 3.1
Interlocking systems -
048018
Vigi earth-leakage protection module

The Vigi earth-leakage protection module may be installed to the right of the circuit
breaker. Connections with the circuit breaker are possible to the top or bottom
of the Vigi module (two versions). The connection is supplied with the Vigi module.
Characteristics
Number of poles 3, 4
Sensitivity (A) 0.03 / 0.3 / 1 / 3
Time delay intentional (ms) 0 60 (1) 150 (1)
max. break time < 40 < 140 < 150
Vigicompact NSA Rated voltage (V) 50/60 Hz 200 to 440 V
Reset pushbutton
Test pushbutton
Protection against nuisance tripping b
DC-component withstand class A
(1) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.
Auxiliaries and accessories

Available auxiliaries include:
b 1 ON/OFF indication contact (OF)
b 1 trip-indication contact (SD)
b 1 voltage release (MN undervoltage release or MX shunt trip)
b 1 extended rotary handle with door locking, directly accessible from outside
the enclosure.
Depth adjuster
This accessory is required to align the front of Multi 9 devices when they are
installed next to a Compact NSA125 or NSA160. Maximum width 324 mm
(36 modules).
Functions and Motor protection
The circuit breakers presented here Motor protection up to 37 kW

provide protection against short circuits Motor rating (kW) 0.37 … 37
and are suitable for isolation as defined Compact NS80
046751
by standard IEC 60947-2.
For complete protection of the motor and
its control device, overload protection may
be provided by either the circuit breaker or
Breaking H 70
a separate Telemecanique thermal relay. capacity (kA rms)
The control device may be of the direct 380/415 V
on-line type (with or without reversing) General circuit-breaker characteristics page 46
or of the “star-delta” type. The Compact NS80H-MA circuit breaker is specially designed for motor protection.
Accompanying trip unit page 46
Combinations are governed by standard A built-in MA magnetic trip unit provides short-circuit protection.
IEC 60947-4.1.
Motor protection up to 250 kW
E26988
Motor rating (kW) 1.1 … 110 18.5…250

Compact NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630
045198
041624
Breaking N 25 36 45
capacity (kA rms) H 70 70 70
380/415 V L 150 150 150
General circuit-breaker characteristics page 18
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers for motor protection are the same as those for
distribution systems, but are fitted with specific motor trip units.
Accompanying trip units pages 47 to 51
MA magnetic trip units provide short-circuit protection. Interchangeable ME electronic trip units
provide protection against short-circuits, overloads and phase unbalance.
Motor protection up to 750 kW

Motor rating (kW) 160…750
Protection coordination (as defined by Compact NS630b to 1600
IEC 60947-4)
E45151
Whatever the power of the motor, the coordination

between the circuit breaker, contactor and relay
can be of either type 1 or 2.
Selection depends on operational requirements
concerning continuity of service and the technical
skills of servicing personnel.
All type 2 Merlin Gerin/Telemecanique combinations
have been tested under the conditions defined by
standards and they are certified ASEFA/LOVAG.
Breaking N 50
capacity (kA rms) H 70
380/415 V L 150
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units
are the same as those for distribution systems.
Accompanying control units page 28
Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit
breakers.
Micrologic 2.0 A and 5.0 A electronic control units provide protection against short-circuits and
overloads. Micrologic 7.0 A provides the same protection functions, plus earth-leakage
protection.
Selection of a trip unit or Micrologic control unit
P (kW) (400 V, 50 Hz) 0.37 1.1 5.5 18.5 37 110 160 250 560 750
E26530
Ir (A) 1.5 2.5 12 40 50 80 100 160 200 220 320 500 800 1000 1350
Compact
MA
NS80H-MA
Compact MA
NS100 … NS250
STR22ME
Compact MA
NS400 … NS630
STR43ME
Compact
Micrologic 2.0 A / 5.0 A / 7.0 A
NS630b … NS1600
characteristics Compact NS80H-MA
This circuit breaker is specially designed for Compact circuit breakers NS80H-MA
the protection of motors rated up to 37 kW: Number of poles 3
b due to its high current-limiting capacity, Control manual (toggle, b
it effectively protects motor starters (type-2 electric -
coordination as per IEC 60947-4, with Connections fixed front connection b
contactors) rear connection -
withdrawable front connection -
b small size for easy installation in motor rear connection -
control centre (MCC) switchboards. Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2
Rated insulation Ui 750
voltage (V)
046751
Rated impulse Uimp 8

withstand voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690
Ultimate breaking Icu AC 50/60 Hz 220 / 240 V 100
capacity (kA rms) 380 / 415 V 70
440 V 65
500 V 25
525 V 25
660/690 V 6
Compact NS80 H-MA Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100 %
electrical 440 V In/2 10000
In 7000
Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1
Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V 100
480 V 65
600 V 10
Protection
Magnetic trip unit built-in
Rating In 1.5 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 80
Instantaneous short-circuit lm adjustable pick-up
protection 6 … 14 x In
Earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication contacts 1 OF + 1 SD
Connections built-in terminals
Terminal extensions and spreaders -
Terminal shields b
Interphase barriers -
DIN rail plate b
Dimensions (mm) WxHxD 90 x 120 x 80
Weight (kg) 1.0
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit
breakers with MA magnetic trip units
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers, General circuit-breaker characteristics page 18

equipped with an MA magnetic trip unit with
adjustable thresholds, offer: MA trip units
b short-circuit protection Rating (A) at 65 °C In 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 150 220 320 500
Compact N/H/L NS100 b b b b b b - - - -
b suitability for isolation.
circuit breaker NS160 - - - b b b b - - -
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers NS250 - - - - - b b b - -
and the trip unit are supplied already H/L NS400 - - - - - - - - b -
assembled. NS630 - - - - - - - - - b
Pick-up Im setting setting setting
6...14 x In 9...14 x In 9...14 x In
041624
Compact NS250H
045198
Compact NS400H-MA
characteristics Compact NS100 to 250
circuit breakers with STR22ME
electronic trip unit
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers, Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers
equipped with an STR22ME electronic trip See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 18.
unit with adjustable thresholds, offer:
b short-circuit protection
b phase-unbalance protection
STR22ME electronic trip unit
b overload protection Protection
b suitability for isolation. Overload protection
LT (long time) protection with adjustable Ir threshold, in compliance with tripping
class 10 as defined by IEC 60947-4.
052163
b short-time protection with fixed pick-up (Im = 13 x Ir) and tripping delay
b instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up (15 x In).
Phase-unbalance protection
This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips the
circuit breaker whenever a phase-current unbalance of 40 % or more occurs. The
circuit-breaker opening time is between 3.5 and 6 seconds.
Overload LED (%Ir)

b OFF: I < 1.05 Ir
Compact NS250 equipped with an STR22ME electronic trip unit b flashing: I u 1.05 Ir.
Test
Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module

(Early-break thermal-fault signal)
This module can be installed in place of the MN or MX release. It operates 300 ms
before the circuit breaker trips on an overload.
The SDTAM module can be used to open a contactor when an overload occurs,
thereby avoiding the opening of the circuit breaker.
It can also be used without a contactor to provide an overload indication on the
STR22ME trip unit, thereby making it possible to differentiate between tripping on
overloads and short-circuits.
Characteristics
b compatible with the following control voltages:
v 24 to 72 V DC and 24 to 48 V AC
v 110 to 240 V AC / DC
b replaces the MN and MX voltage releases.
t 1 7 6
E26985
E94521
Ir
In=50A ImSTR 22 ME u1,05 Ir
Ir 37.5 40
7,2Ir IEC 947.4 / cl.10
35.5 42.5
3
33.5 45 7,0s
4
31.5 47.5
5 30 50
A Ir 13 Ir test
0 Ir 13Ir I
1 long-time threshold STR22ME trip unit

2 tripping class 10 as defined by IEC 60947-4 Ratings (A) 20 to 70 °C 20…100 150 220
3 short-time pick-up NS100N/H/L b - -
4 short-time tripping delay NS160N/H/L b b -
5 instantaneous pick-up NS250N/H/L b b b
6 test connector
7 percent load indication Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir adjustable, 10 settings
0.6...1 x In
Tripping class 10
(IEC 60947-4)
Time delay (s) fixed
(min…max.) at 1.5 x Ir 120…320
at 6 x Ir 6…15
at 7.2 Ir 4…10
Motor-overload indication LED
Phase-unbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1
Tripping threshold u 40 % unbalance
Time delay 3.5 to 6 seconds
Pick-up Isd fixed
13 x Ir
Accuracy ±20 %
Max. resettable time (ms) fixed
10
Max. break time 60
Pick-up Ii fixed
15 x In
Options
SDTAM module b
Overload protection settings (A)

rating (A) thresholds (A)
20 12 12.6 13.4 14.2 15 16 17 18 19 20
25 15 15.7 16.7 17.7 18.7 20 21.2 22.5 23.7 25
40 24 25.5 27 28.5 30 32 34 36 38 40
50 30 31.5 33.5 35.5 37.5 40 42.5 45 47.5 50
80 48 51 54 57 60 64 68 72 76 80
100 60 63 67 71 75 80 85 90 95 100
150 90 95 101 107 113 120 127 135 142 150
220 132 140 148 157 166 177 187 198 209 220
circuit breakers with STR43ME
electronic trip unit
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers
equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 18.
unit with adjustable thresholds, offer:
b phase-unbalance protection
STR43ME electronic trip unit
b overload protection Protection
b suitability for isolation. Overload protection
True (rms) long-time protection with an adjustable threshold:
b Io base setting (5 settings from 0.5 to 0.8) and Ir fine adjustment
(8 settings from 0.8 to 1)
053192
b adjustable tripping delay, in compliance with tripping classes 10A, 10 and 20 as

defined by IEC 60947-4.
The STR43ME offers two motor-cooling time constants, associated with the motor
starting class:
b short cooling time constant (the same as the heating time constant), providing
maximum continuity of service and satisfactory motor protection
b long cooling time constant (four times the heating time constant), providing
maximum motor protection.
b short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay
Phase-unbalance protection
This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips
the circuit breaker whenever a phase-current unbalance of 40 % or more occurs.
The circuit-breaker opening time is 4 seconds ±10 %.
Compact NS630 equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip unit
Indications: Overload LED (%Ir)

b OFF: I < 1.05 Ir
b flashing: I u 1.05 Ir
Fault indications
LEDs indicate the type of fault that caused tripping:
b overload (long-time protection) or abnormal component temperature (> Ir)
b short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (> Isd)
b phase unbalance (LED on the right)
b microprocessor malfunction:
v all four (%Ir), (> Ir), (> Isd) and (phase unbalance) LEDs ON.
Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. When a fault
occurs, the LED indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten
minutes to conserve battery power. The information is however stored in memory
and the LED can be turned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton.
The LED automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit
breaker is reset.
Test
The test pushbutton tests the battery and the LEDs.
Self monitoring
The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature is
detected.
Options
Three options are available:
b ammeter (I)
b contactor tripping module (SDTAM)
b communication (COM).
t
E26987
6 1 2 3 7
1
2
E32566
STR 43 ME %Ir >Ir >Isd test fault
Io Ir Isd µP
3 .71 .8 .90 .93 9 10
.63 .88 .95 8 11 > Ir
4 .56 .85 .98 7 12 A
.5 .8 .8 1 13 tr
5 x In x Io
6
x Ir
> Im
tsd
tr 20 20 > Ih
test 10 Ir I1 I2 I3
10
0 Ir Isd Ii I + - 10A 10A
Ir Isd li
1 long-time threshold class

IEC 947-4-1
2 tripping class
3 short-time pick-up
4 short-time tripping delay STR43ME trip unit
5 instantaneous pick-up Ratings (A) 20 to 70 °C 120 200 320 500
6 test connector Circuit NS400N/H/L b b b -
7 percent load indication breakers NS630N/H/L - - - b
Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir adjustable, 40 settings - 0.4...0.8 x In
Tripping class 10A, 10, 20
(IEC 60947-4)
Time delay (s) adjustable
(min. ... max.) at 1.5 x Ir 144…198 270…357 433…595
at 6 x Ir 5.8…7.3 10.9…13.1 17.4…21.8
at 7.2 Ir 4…5 7.3…9.1 12…15
Phase-unbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1
Tripping threshold u 40 % unbalance
Time delay 4 s ±10 %
Pick-up Isd adjustable, 8 settings - 6...13 x Ir
Accuracy ±15 %
Time delay (ms) fixed
max. resettable time 10
max. break time 60
Pick-up Ii fixed - 13 x Ir max.
Other functions
Motor-overload LED b
Indications module b
Options
Ammeter (I) b
SDTAM module b
Communication (COM) b
Options for STR43ME trip unit

Ammeter (I)
Possible
A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest
combinations:
load. The value of each current I1, I2, I3 and the long-time current setting Ir may be
bI
successively displayed by pressing a scroll button.
b I + COM
LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.
b SDTAM
b SDTAM + I Ammeter display limits
b SDTAM + I + COM b minimum current u 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed
b maximum current y 10 x In.
Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module

(Early-break thermal-fault signal)
See the information on this optional module on page 44.
Communication (COM)
This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules.
Transmitted data:
b settings
b phase currents (rms values)
b highest current of the three phases
b overload-condition alarm
b cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
Functions and Protection of industrial
characteristics control panels
Overview of solutions
Compact NS circuit breakers are specially Compact NSC100

designed to protect incoming feeders and Rated current (A) 12.5…100
groups of outgoing circuits on industrial
054556
control panels:
b compliance with standards applicable
worldwide including IEC 60947-2
UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2
and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14
Breaking N 18
b overload and short-circuit protection capacity (kA rms)
b isolation with positive contact indication, 380/480 V
making it possible to service machines General circuit-breaker characteristics page 53
Compact NSC100 circuit breakers are specially designed to protect industrial control panels.
safely by isolating them from all power
Accompanying trip unit page 54
sources The built-in TMD thermal-magnetic trip unit provides:
b installation in universal and functional b overload protection (adjustable-threshold thermal device)
b short-circuit protection (fixed-pick-up magnetic device).
type enclosures
b NA switch-disconnector version. Compact NS100 to 630
Rated current (A) 12.5 … 12.5 ... 12.5 ... 60... 250...
100 160 250 400 630
E44356
Compact NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
045198
push
041624
to
trip
UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2 IEC 60947-2

Breaking N 25 35 35 42 42
capacity (kA rms) H 65 65 65 65 65
380/480 V
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are designed for protection of distribution systems and
are also suitable for protection of industrial control panels.
Accompanying trip unit page 22 to 27
The trip units are interchangeable.
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers are equipped with TMD thermal-magnetic or STR
electronic trip units.
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers are equipped exclusively with STR electronic trip units.
Circuit breaker NSC100N
Compact NS100N circuit breakers are Compact circuit breaker NSC100N

specially designed to protect incoming Number of poles 3, 4
feeders and groups of outgoing circuits on Control manual (toggle, b
industrial control panels. electric -
The NSC100NA switch-disconnector Connections fixed front connection b
version is also available. rear connection -
with- front connection -
drawable rear connection -
Mounting on DIN rail b
054556
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2

Rated insulation Ui 750
voltage (V)
Rated impulse Uimp 8
withstand voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690
DC 250
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 220/240 V 42
(kA rms) 50/60 380/415 V 18
Hz 440 V 18
500 V 10
Compact NSC100N 525 V 10
DC 125 V 5
250 V (2P) 5
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100 %
electrical 440 V In/2 10000
In 7000
Electrical characteristics as per UL 508
Breaking capacity (kA) AC 50/60 Hz 240 V 42
480 V 18
600 V 10
Protection
Built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit
Ratings In 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 70 80 100
Instantaneous short-circuit lm fixed pick-up
protection (A) 600 600 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1250
Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi module
protection combination with Vigirex relay
Auxiliary contacts b
Early-make or early-break contact b
Connection built-in terminals
Accessories terminal shields b
interphase barriers -
escutcheons b
Dimensions (mm) 3P 90 x 120 x 80
WxHxD 4P 120 x 120 x 80
Weight (kg) 3P 1.0
4P 1.3
054556

The Vigi earth-leakage protection module may be installed to the right of the circuit
breaker. Connections with the circuit breaker are possible to the top or bottom of
the Vigi module (two versions). The connection is supplied with the Vigi module.
Characteristics
Number of poles 3, 4
Sensitivity (A) 0.03 / 0.3 / 1 / 3
Time delay intentional (ms) 0 60 (1) 150 (1)
max. break time < 40 < 140 < 150
Rated voltage (V) 50/60 Hz 200 to 440 V
Reset pushbutton
Vigicompact NSC100N
Test pushbutton
Protection against nuisance tripping b
DC-component withstand class A
Functions and Protection of industrial
characteristics control panels
Trip units, auxiliaries,
installation enclosures
Trip-unit selection
P (hp) (480 V, 3P) 3 10 15 20 30 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 150 250 400
Ir (A) 12 16 25 32 40 48 63 70 80 100 160 205 220 320 500
E58713
Compact
TMD
NSC100N
Compact
NS100 … NS250 STR22ME
Compact
STR43ME / STR23SE / STR53UE
NS400 … NS630
STR electronic trip units are designed for:

b overload protection
b phase-failure protection (STR22ME and STR43ME).
TMD thermal-magnetic trip units are designed for:
b overload protection.
Type NA devices are switch-disconnectors which must always be protected
upstream in accordance with applicable installation standards.
Circuit breakers trip units UL/CSA approvals
NSC100N TMD “Manual Motor Controller:
NA Across the line starter &
General use“
NS100/160/250 N/H STR22ME “Manual Motor Controller:
NA Across the line starter”
TMD “Manual Motor Controller:
STR22SE/GE General Use”
NS400/630 N/H STR43ME
NA
STR23SE
STR53UE
Auxiliaries
All auxiliaries can be added to the circuit breaker by the user:
b padlocking devices (in the OFF position)
b rotary handle
b status-indication auxiliary contacts (ON, OFF and tripped)
b shunt (MX) or undervoltage (MN) releases
b early-make or early-break contacts.
Rotary handle
Available in direct or extended versions for mounting up to 590 mm behind front.
Versions include:
b black front with black handle
b yellow front with red handle (for machine tools or emergency off as per IEC 204 /
VDE 0013).
All rotary handles can be padlocked in the OFF position.
Optional door interlock, recommended for MCC panels (motor control centres).
Early-make or early-break contacts
These auxiliary contacts make it possible to de-energise the downstream auxiliary
circuits of the control panel as well as the auxiliary circuits supplying the MN
release, if applicable.
W D
Installation in an enclosure
Compact circuit breakers can be installed in a metal enclosure together with other
devices (contactors, motor-protection circuit breakers, LEDs, etc.)
E44458
Minimum enclosure dimensions

Circuit breakers Height (mm) Depth (mm) Width (mm)
NSC100N 300 150 200
H NS100 N/H 457 130 208
NS160 N/H 457 130 208
NS250 N/H 457 130 208
NS400 N/H - - -
NS630 N/H - - -
Installation enclosure
UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking
E42651
The UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 approval is LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL. 
for a “Manual Motor Controller” (“across the

R
34XL UL / CSA logo

NSC100N-NA
line starter” or “general use”). This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering
not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC
The circuit breakers are 100 % rated. indicated here below, or the upstream protective device
interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by
any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.
SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz Breaking capacity
Vac
240 42
480 25
600 10
Vac 115 230 460 575
1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph
ratings (A) hp
16 1 2 2 5 5 10 7.5 10
20 1.5 3 3 5 7.5 10 10 15
25 2 3 3 7.5 10 15 10 20
32 2 5 5 10 10 20 15 30
40 3 5 7.5 10 15 30 20 30
Horsepower rating
50 3 7.5 10 15 20 30 25 40
63 5 10 10 20 25 40 30 60
70 5 10 15 25 30 50 40 60
80 7.5 10 15 30 30 60 40 75
100 10 15 20 30 40 75 50 100
tripping current 125% 100% rated
temperature rating tightening torque
75°C
wire size lb-inch Nm
Cable cross-section
14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu
50 5.5
and tightening torques
12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al
NSC100 device marking

(circuit breaker with built-in trip unit)
E42650
LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL. 
34XL
R
UL / CSA logo
NS100-160-250 N/H/NA
Equipped with TMD/DE or STR trip unit
This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering
not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC
indicated here below, or the upstream protective device
interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by
any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.
SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz Breaking capacity
Vac NS100 NS160 NS250
N H N H N H
240 85 85 85 85 85 85
480 25 65 35 65 35 65
600 10 10 10 10 18 18
tripping current 125% 100% rated
temperature rating tightening torque Terminal kit
75°C reference
wire size lb-inch Nm 3P 4P
14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu
12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al
130 11.3 29242 29243 Cable cross-section
and tightening torques
4 AWG to 2 AWG Cu,Al 180 20
29259 29260
1 AWG to 350 kcmil Cu,Al 230 26
NS100 to 250 device marking

(circuit breaker with interchangeable trip unit)
E42651
In=220A STR 22 ME > 1,05 Ir

Ir 166 177 220A 1ph 3ph
157 187 7,2 Ir IEC 947.4 / cl.10 Vac hp + -
148 198 115 15 40
7,0 s 230 50 75
140 209 460 50 150
132 220 575 50 200
A Ir 13Ir 100% rated test
Trip-unit marking
Functions and Earth-leakage protection
Earth-leakage protection is obtained by: Circuit breakers equipped with an add-on Vigi module
b fitting a Vigi module on the circuit breaker (Vigicompact)
(Compact NS100 to 630) Rated current (A) 100… 630
Vigicompact NSC100 N NS100 to 250 N/H/L
b installing a Micrologic 7.0 A control unit
NSA160 N/E NS400 and 630 N/H/L
(Compact NS630b to 3200) NS125 E
b using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids
044333
(all Compact circuit breakers).
054556
General circuit-breaker characteristics pages 18, 42 and 53
Compact NS100 to 630 and NSA160 circuit breakers are presented in the “Protection of
distribution systems” section and the Compact NSC100 circuit breaker is presented in the
“Protection of industrial control panels” section.
Accompanying Vigi modules
Earth-leakage protection is achieved by installing a Vigi module directly on the circuit-breaker
terminals.
Circuit breakers equipped with a control unit offering

integrated earth-leakage protection and an external
rectangular sensor
Compact NS630b to 1000 N/H/L NS1600b to 3200
NS1250 and 1600 N/H
E45151
E45178

Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are presented in the “Protection of distribution
systems” section.
Accompanying control units page 30
Micrologic 7.0 A electronic control units offer earth-leakage protection as standard.
Earth-leakage protection using a Vigirex relay

Vigirex Earth-leakage relay Separate toroids
051352
044322
Compact circuit breaker + Vigirex relay combination

Vigirex relays may be used to add external earth-leakage protection to Compact NS circuit
breakers. The circuit breakers must be equipped with an MN or MX voltage release. Vigirex
relays are very useful when special time-delay or tripping-threshold values are required, or when
there are major installation constraints (circuit breaker already installed and connected, limited
space available, etc.).
Vigirex-relay characteristics:
b sensitivity adjustable from 30 mA to 250 mA and eight time-delay settings (0 to 1 second)
b closed toroids (30 to 300 mm in diameter) or split toroids (46 to 110 mm in diameter).
Options:
b trip alarm by a fail-safe contact
b pre-alarm LED and contact (threshold = 0.5 x I∆n)
b 400 Hz distribution systems, etc.
Compliance with standards:
b IEC 60947-2, appendix B
b French decree dated 14 November 1988
b IEC 60255-4 and IEC 60801-2 to 5 covering protection against nuisance tripping due to transient
overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on the distribution system, electrostatic
discharges, radiofrequency interference.
b IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mA
b VDE 664, operation down to -25 °C.
Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact)
Vigicompact NSA160 and NSC100 circuit breakers

044333
with earth-leakage protection

See pages 43 and 53, respectively.
Vigicompact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers

with earth-leakage protection
Addition of the Vigi module does not alter circuit-breaker characteristics:
b compliance with standards
b degree of protection, class II front-face isolation
b positive contact indication
b electrical characteristics
b trip-unit characteristics
b installation and connection modes
b indication, measurement and control auxiliaries
b installation and connection accessories.
Dimensions and weights NS100/160 NS250 NS400/630
Vigicompact NS250N Dimensions 3 poles 105 x 236 x 86 135 x 355 x 110
W x H x D (mm) 4 poles 140 x 236 x 86 180 x 355 x 110
Weight (kg) 3 poles 2.5 2.8 8.8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 poles 3.2 3.4 10.8

E21007
avant test diélectrique

enlever ce couvercle
150
310 before dielectric test
remove this cover
vigi
Compliance with standards:
60
0
∆t(ms)
vigi MH
T R NS 250
200 / 440 V - 50 / 60 Hz b IEC 60947-2, appendix B
1
3 10
N 1 3 5
b French decree dated 14 November 1988
0,3 I∆n(A) T b IEC 60255-4 and IEC 60801-2 to 5 covering protection against nuisance tripping
HS 0,03 ( ∆t = 0 )
2 4 6
due to transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on the
distribution system, electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference.
1 sensitivity setting b IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mA
2 time-delay setting (for selective earth-fault protection)
b VDE 664, operation down to -25 °C.
3 lead-seal fixture for controlled access to settings
4 test button simulating an earth-fault for regular Remote indications
checks on the tripping function Vigi modules may be equipped with an auxiliary contact (SDV) to remotely signal
5 reset button (reset required after earth-fault tripping) tripping due to an earth fault.
6 rating plate
7 housing for SDV auxiliary contact Power supply
Vigi modules are self-supplied internally by the distribution-system voltage and
therefore do not require any external source. They continue to function even when
supplied by only two phases.
Plug-in circuit breaker
The Vigi module can be installed on a plug-in base.
Special accessories are required (see the section Vigi module selection table
on part numbers). Vigi ME Vigi MH Vigi MB
Number of poles 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1)
NS125 E b b -
NS100 N/H/L b b -
NS160 N/H/L b b -
NS250 N/H/L - b -
NS400 N/H/L - - b
NS630 N/H/L - - b
Protection characteristics
Sensitivity fixed adjustable adjustable
I∆n (A) 0.3 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 - 30
Time delay
Intentional fixed adjustable adjustable
delay (ms) < 40 0 60 (2) 150 (2) 310 (2) 0 60 150 310
Max. breaking < 40 < 40 <140 <300 <800 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800
time (ms)
Rated voltage 200...440 200... 440 - 440...550 200...440 - 440...550
V AC 50/60 Hz
(1) Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 3P circuit breakers used for single-phase or two-
phase protection.
Note.
The Vigi module for the Compact NSA160 circuit breaker is presented on page 43.
Functions and Control and isolation
E94915
Masterpact Masterpact
NT source coupling
NW switch-disconnector Masterpact
NW or NT
main power
main power distribution board distribution board for
for commercial applications industrial applications
15 -40 kA 20 -80 kA
y 1000 A y 1600 A
replacement
source
industrial
modular sub- distribution automatic
distribution board board control panel
source
y 160 A : 15 - 25 kA changeover
y 160 A 15 - 25 kA y 400 A : 20 - 80 kA system
y 400 A
final distribution
local enclosure for local local
isolation commercial isolation isolation
enclosure applications enclosure control panel enclosure
y 10 kA y 25 kA
y 63 A y 10 kA y 5 kA 5-15 kA
y 40 A
y 63 A y 630 A
y 125 A
M M M M M
N.B. adjacent to or built into the machine
Circuit breaker-
disconnector
building utilities building final continuous processes manufacturing processes

distribution and individual machines
Switch-
disconnector
standardised symbols
Switch-disconnectors
056470
E58880
86087
052164
086106
Masterpact Compact NS Interpact INS Compact NS Vario

E45182
056385
054361
054629
035050
Compact NS Interpact IN Interpact INS NG125 Multi 9
86087
Compact switch-disconnectors are used to
control and isolate electrical distribution
circuits. In addition to these basic
functions, other functions for safety, remote
control and convenience include:
b earth-leakage protection
b auxiliary MN/MX releases
b remote operation
b ammeter, etc.
Compact switch-disconnectors may be
interlocked with another Compact switch-
disconnector or circuit breaker to constitute
a source-changeover system. Compact NS250 switch-disconnector
053039
053041
044313
Compact switch-disconnector Compact switch-disconnector MN/MX
equipped with a Vigi earth- equipped with a motor mechanism voltage
leakage module release
Functions and Control and disconnection
characteristics Compact NSA125NA and NSA160NA
Installation standards require upstream Compact switch-disconnectors

protection. However, due to their high-set Number of poles
magnetic release, Compact NSA125NA Control manual toggle
and NSA160NA switch-disconnectors are electric
self protected. Connections fixed front connection
rear connection
withdrawable front connection
86085
rear connection
Built-in connectors for 1.5 to 90 mm2 cables
Mounting on DIN rail
Front-panel cutout 45 mm high
Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 °C
DC
Compact NSA125NA Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz
220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V
500 V
Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone)
maximum (with protection circuit
breaker upstream)
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 1s
3s
20 s
electrical AC 690 V AC22A
440 V AC23A
electrical AC 250 V AC23A
Pollution degree
Protection
Indication contacts
Voltage releases
Installation and connection
Accessories
Dimensions (mm) fixed, front connection 2/3P

WxHxD 4P
Weight (kg) fixed, front connection 3P
4P
Source-changeover system (see section on "source-changeover systems")
Manual source-changeover systems
NSA125NA NSA160NA
3, 4 3, 4
b b
b b
- -
b b
- -
- -
- -
b b
b b
b b
125 160
500 500
8 8
500 500
250 250
AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A
125 125 160 160
125 125 160 160
125 125 160 160
125 100 160 125
2.1
330
1500
1500
580
b
10000
5000
5000
5000
b
III
b
b
1 OF + 1 SD
MN or MX
terminal shields
depth adjuster
90 x 120 x 82.5
120 x 120 x 80
1.1
1.4
characteristics Compact NSC100NA and
NS100NA to 630NA switch-
disconnectors
protection. However, due to their high-set Number of poles
magnetic release, Compact NSC100NA Control manual toggle
and NS100NA to 630NA switch- electric
disconnectors are self protected. Connections fixed front connection
rear connection
86087
rear connection
rear connection
DC
Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz
220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V (2)
500/525 V
Compact NS100NA
D 660/690
250 V (1 P
500 V (2 P in series
Short-circuit making capacit lc (kA peak minimum (switch-disconnector alone
maximum (with protectio
circuit breaker upstream
Short-time withstand curren lc (A rms 1
3
20
Suitability for isolatio
Durability (C-O cycles mechanica
electrica A 690 AC22
440 AC23
D 250 DC23
Positive contact indicatio
Pollution degre
Protectio
Add-on earth-leakage protectio add-on Vigi modul
combination with Vigirex rela
Additional indication and control auxiliarie
Indication contact
Voltage release MX shunt releas
MN undervoltage releas
Voltage-presence indicato
Current-transformer modul
Ammeter modul
Insulation-monitoring modul
Remote communication by bu
Device status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts
Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism
Installatio
Accessorie terminal extensions and spreader
terminal shields and interphase barrier
escutcheon
Dimensions (mm fixed, front connectio 2/3
W x H x 4
Weight (kg fixed, front connectio 3
4
Source-changeover system (see section "on source-changeover systems"
Manual source-changeover system
Remote-operated and automatic source-changeover system
(1) 2P in 3P case
(2) Suitable for 480 V NEMA
NSC100NA NS100NA NS160NA NS250NA NS400NA NS630NA
3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
- b b b b b
b b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
- b b b b b
100 100 160 250 400 630

750 750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690 690
250 500 500 500 500 500
AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A
100 100 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
- - 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A
- - 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
- - 100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
2.1 2.6 3.6 4.9 7.1 8.5
330 330 330 330 330 330
1500 1800 2500 3500 5000 6000

1500 1800 2500 3500 5000 6000
580 690 960 1350 1930 2320
b b b b b b
20000 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
7000 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
7000 30000 (50000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2)
7000 30000 (50000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2)
b b b b b b
III III III III III III
b b b
b b b
b b b
b b b
b b b
- b b
- b b
- b b
- b b
b b b
- b b
b b b
b b b
b b b
90 x 120 x 80 105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110
120 x 120 x 80 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110
0.9 1.5 to 1.8 5.2
1.2 2.0 to 2.2 6.8
b (locking) b b
b b
Functions and
characteristics Control and disconnection
Compact NS630bNA to NS1600NA
protection. Number of poles
electric
E45179

rear connection
rear connection
DC
220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V (1)
500/525 V
660/690 V
Compact NS800NA DC
250 V (1P)
500 V (2P in series)
maximum (with protection
circuit breaker upstream) (2)
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 0.5 s
1s
20 s
electrical AC 690 V AC22A/In
440 V AC23A/In
Pollution degree
Protection
Add-on earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication contacts
Device status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts)
Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism)
Installation
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) fixed 3P
WxHxD 4P
Weight (kg) fixed 3P
4P
Source-changeover system (see section "on source-changeover systems")
Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic
(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.

(2) Protection by upstream type NS, NT or NW circuit breaker:
see additional technical information.
NS630bNA NS800NA NS1000NA NS1250NA NS1600NA
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
630 800 1000 1250 1600

750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690
500 500 500 500 500
AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1520
DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
50 50 50 50 50
330 330 330 330 330
25 25 25 25 25
17 17 17 17 17
4 4 4 4 4
b b b b b
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
2000 2000 2000 2000 1000
2000 2000 2000 2000 1000
b b b b b
III III III III III
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
327 x 210 x 147
327 x 280 x 147
14
18
characteristics Compact NS1600b to 3200NA

protection. However, Compact NS1600b to Number of poles
3200NA switch-disconnectors are self- Control manual toggle
protected for all currents higher than electric
130 kA peak. Connections fixed front connection
rear connection
rear connection
E45182

DC
220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V (1)
500/525 V
660/690 V
maximum (with protection
circuit breaker upstream) (2)
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 3s
Compact NS2000NA
Integrated instantaneous protection (kA peak ±10 %)
0 %) 130 130 1
solation b b b b
000 60 0 60 600
1000 1000
n 1000 1000 1000
ication b
III
II III III Prot ion Add-on earth-leakage prot
ination with Vigirex relay b Additi
nal indication and
dication contact b
MX shunt release b
undervoltage
release b
ccessories esc cheon
(mm) fi 3
0 W x H D P
5
Weight (kg) fixed 3P 23 4P 36Source-changeover system (see
ection "on source-changeover systems")Manual source-changeover
(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.

(2) Protection by upstream type NS, NT or NW circuit breaker:
see additional technical information.
NS1600bNA NS2000NA NS2500NA NS3200NA
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
b b b b
- - - -
- - - -
b b b b
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
1600 2000 2500 3200

750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690
500 500 500 500
AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
135 135 135 135
178 178 178 178
32 32 32 32
130 130 130 130
b b b b
6000 6000 6000 6000
1000 1000 1000 4000
1000 1000 1000 2000
b b b b
III III III III
b
b
b
b
350 x 420 x 160
350 x 535 x 160
23
36
Functions and Source-changeover systems
characteristics Presentation
For complete, in-depth information, see the Manual source-changeover systems

“Interpact, Compact, Masterpact source- This is the most simple type. Intervention by technical personnel is required, i.e.
transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is not immediate.
changeover systems” catalogue.
A manual source-changeover system can be installed on two to three manually-
controlled circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors. Interlocking is mechanical.
Interlocks prevent connection to both sources at the same time, even momentarily.
87921
Remote-operated source-changeover systems

This is the most commonly employed system. No human intervention is required.
Switching from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically.
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three circuit
breakers or switch-disconnectors linked by an electrical interlocking system
(different configurations possible). Device operation is backed up by a mechanical
interlocking fixture that prevents parallel connection if the electrical system
malfunctions or if an incorrect manual operation is attempted.
Automatic source-changeover systems

An automatic controller may be added to the remote-operated source-changeover
system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes.
This solution ensures optimum energy management:
b switching to a replacement source depending on external requirements
Service sector b management of power sources
b hospital operating rooms b regulation
b safety systems for tall buildings b emergency source replacement, etc.
b computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc.)
b lighting systems in shopping centres
The automatic controller may be fitted with an option for communication with a
supervisor.
029693
Industry
b assembly lines
b engine rooms on ships
b critical auxiliaries in thermal power stations
IMG0021
Infrastructure
b port and railway installations
b runway lighting systems
b control systems for military installations
Manual source-changeover systems
A manual source-changeover system can Interlocking of two or three toggle-controlled devices

be installed on two to three manually- Two devices can be interlocked using this system. Two identical interlocking
systems can be used to interlock three devices installed side by side, in which case
operated circuit breakers or switch- one device is in the ON position and the two others are in the OFF position.
disconnectors. Interlocking is mechanical. The system is locked using one or two padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm).
Interlocks prevent connection to both Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
sources at the same time, even There are two interlocking-system models:
momentarily. b Compact NS100 to 250
b Compact NS400 to 630 (can also be used for a Compact NS100 to 250).
Devices must be either all fixed or all withdrawable.
Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles

E21287
The rotary handles are padlocked with the devices in the OFF position.
The mechanism inhibits the two devices being closed at the same time, but does
allow for both to be open (OFF) at the same time.
Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary
handles can be interlocked. Interlocking of a Compact NS100 to 630 with a
Compact NS630b to 1600 is not possible.
Interlocking of two toggle-controlled devices
Interlocking of a number of devices using keylocks
(captive keys)
Interlocking uses two identical keylocks with a single key. This solution enables
interlocking between two devices that are physically distant or that have
ON significantly different characteristics, for example between a low and a medium-
E21399
I
ON
I voltage device, or between Compact NS circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.
I
ON A system of wall-mounted units with captive keys makes possible a large number
tripped
ON
I
reset
of combinations between many devices.
O
OFF
tripped O O FF Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices

reset
O
OFF
All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary
O O FF handles or motor mechanisms can be interlocked.
Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles Interlocking of two devices on a base plate
A base plate designed for two Compact devices can be installed horizontally or
vertically on a mounting rail. Interlocking is carried out on the base plate by a
mechanism located behind the devices. Access to the device controls and trip units
is not blocked.
E26766
ON
Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
All manually operated Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers and switch-
I
ON
I reset
O
disconnectors can be interlocked.
Devices must be fixed or plug-in versions, with or without earth-leakage protection
OFF
O
or measurement modules.
OFF
Interlocking with keylocks

E33943
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
Interlocking on base plates
Functions and Source-changeover systems
characteristics Remote-operated systems
Source-changeover system without a controller

053042
In this case, the automatic-control system to initiate changeovers between the

Normal and Replacement sources under predefined conditions must be provided
by the installation designer.
E32699
Remote-operated source-changeover system

QR
QN
053060
3 2
1
053058
Auxiliary control plate Controller

Source-changeover system with a controller
In this case, changeovers between the Normal and Replacement sources under
predefined conditions are initiated by a Merlin Gerin controller.
E79369
E79368
IN
E32700
LIN GER
0 . OFF MER O
UN =
N
0 . OFF
UR 0,5s
R
UN
N I 0,5s
ON /
I /O
ON / R
Test
OFF
1
UN =
/O
Test OFF
fault
fault
O stop
test
FFO O
manu
hsup
FFO
I hsup
NO hsup
NO h
I
sup R
N
FFO
O
d e gr
FFO
O
ahcs
id degr
ahcs
id
352
10 352
10
B US
IN
LIN GER UN =
O
MER
N
UR
R
UN
N I
ON /
I R
ON / /O 1
OFF UN =
/O
OFF
fault
fault
auto
5
stop
test
manu rator
STOP
gene
R
O
FFO
hsup
I
6
NO h
sup O
FFO
hsup
NO h
I
sup
FFO
O
d e gr
ahcs
id
FFO
O
degr
ahcs
id
352
10
Coupling accessory
This accessory may be used with the source-changeover system (with or without a
352
10
controller) to facilitate connections.

Interlocking by rods Interlocking by cables
E32701
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of:

1 circuit breaker QN equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to
the Normal source
2 circuit breaker QR equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to
the Replacement source
3 mounting base plate with mechanical interlocking (NS100 to 630) or an interlocking system
using rods or cables (NS630b to 1600)
4 electrical interlocking unit. IVE for NS100 to 630 or an electrical system provided by the
installer for NS630b to 1600. Electrical interlocking system example: part no. 51156903 in the
source-changeover system catalogue.
Switching between sources can be automated by adding:
5 ACP auxiliary control plate
6 BA or UA controller, or an electrical system provided by the installer for NS630b to 1600.
Electrical system example: part no. 51156904 and 51156904 in the source-
changeover system catalogue.
Accessory:
7 coupling accessory (downstream connection) for NS100 to 630.
Controllers
When used with a remote-operated source- Controller BA UA

changeover system, the BA or UA Four-position switch
controllers initiate the automatic Automatic operation b b
changeover operations according to user- Forced operation on Normal source b b
Forced operation on Replacement source b b
defined sequences. Stop (both Normal and Replacement sources OFF) b b
Automatic operation
Monitoring of the Normal source and automatic changeover b b
Engine generator set start-up control b
053058R
Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of engine generator set b

Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority loads b
Changeover to Replacement source if one of the Normal- b
source phases is absent
Test
By opening of the P25M circuit breaker upstream b
of the controller
By pressing the test button on the front of the controller b
Indications
Circuit-breaker status indication on the front b b
of the controller: ON, OFF, fault trip
Automatic-mode indication contact b b
Other functions
BA controller Selection of type of Normal source b
(single-phase or three-phase)
Voluntary transfer to Replacement source b b
(e.g. energy-management commands)
During peak-tariff periods (energy-management commands), b
053058
forced operation on Normal source if Replacement source is

not operational
Additional control contact (not in controller). b b
Transfer to Replacement source only if contact closed
(e.g. UR frequency check)
Replacement-source maximum start-up time setting b
Options
Communications option b
Power supply
Control voltages (1) 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz b b
380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz b b
440 V 60 Hz b b
Operating thresholds
Undervoltage 0.35 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un b b
UA controller Phase failure 0.5 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un b
Voltage presence voltage u 0.85 Un b b
IP degree of protection against penetration of solid bodies and liquids (EN 60529)
and IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts (EN 50102)
Front IP40 b b
Side IP30 b b
Connectors IP20 b b
Front IK07 b b
Characteristics of output contacts
Rated thermal current (A) 8
Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V
AC DC
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13
Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 6 8 2
48 V 8 7 5 5 2 -
110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 -
220/240 V 8 6 4 3 - -
250 V - - - - 0.4 -
380/415 V 5 - - - - -
440 V 4 - - - - -
660/690 V - - - - - -
(1) Power supplied by the ACP auxiliary control plate. The supply voltage must be the same for
the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit breaker operating mechanisms. If this voltage is the
same as the distribution-system voltage, the Normal and Replacement sources can be used
directly for the power supply. If not, a BC-type or equivalent isolation transformer must be used.
Functions and Communication
Integration of the circuit breaker or the There are two possibilities for the 100 to 630 A range:
switch-disconnector in a supervison system b communicating auxiliaries
requires either the communicating They replace the standard auxiliaries and connect directly to the Digipact bus.
Three equipment levels:
auxiliaries or the SC150 interface. v communicating auxiliary contacts, comprising:
Compact devices fit perfectly in the SMS - OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts
Powerlogic electrical installation - electronic module
management system by communicating - prefabricated wiring.
v communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module, comprising:
using Digipact protocols. An external - OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts
gateway offers communication via other - motor-mechanism module (220 V AC) (1)
networks including: - electronic module
b Profibus - prefabricated wiring.
v communicating carriage switches for the chassis, comprising:
b Ethernet - CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) contacts
- electronic module
053172
- wiring connector.
b SC150 interface
Using the SC150 interface, it is possible to integrate a device equipped with non-
communicating auxiliaries into a supervison system.
The SC150 interface is used to connect:
v the auxiliary contacts on the circuit breaker (OF, SD, SDE, SDV, CD, CE)
v the remote-operation system (on, off, reset)
v the communication output for the STR53UE and STR43ME electronic trip units
equipped with the COM option
v an unassigned digital input.
Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts

and motor-mechanism module
054481
Withdrawable Compact NS on its chassis equipped with

communicating auxiliary contacts
054516
SC150 indication and control interface
(1) For voltages other than 220 V AC, use a standard motor-mechanism module (non-
communicating) together with an SC150 indication and control interface.
Overview of functions
E94526
Software
Communication
interface RS 232C,Ethernet
RS 485
Communication
bus
IN JBus
LIN GER
MERSV
pulsar BBus
com
com error
24V
Data concentrator
OK
error
1 3
DC150
N°1
N°1
Device
SC150 indication and

control interface
act
comp
0NH
NB25 Uimp 8kV.
Ui 750V. Icu
(kA)
Ue
(V) 100
0
220/245
70 2
65
380/41 ed
50 discharg
440 5
10
500/520
660/69
85
compactL
NS250 Uimp 8kV.
O OFF
Ui 750V. Icu(kA)
250 act
0% Icu Ue(V) 150
comp
Compact NS with
Ics=10 220/240 150
0NH
380/415 130
∅5...8 NB25 Uimp 8kV.
cat A
70
440
500
20
100
Ui 750V. Icu
600/690
Digipact Bus
-2 NEMA (kA)
UNE 0 250
250
D Ue
IEC947 BS CEI cat A TM Icu C 100
VDE 125/16 (V)
UTE push
to
100%
Ics = 250A/40°
VDE 220/245
0 70 2
trip
UTE
947-2UNE NEMA 65
IEC
CEI 380/41 ed
5
BS
50 discharg
Im 10 440 5
10
6 500/520
85
compactL O OFF
communicating Compact circuit breaker with standard

Ir 660/69 NS250 Uimp 8kV.
9
Im
1 Ui 750V. Icu(kA)
7 250
Ir 0% Icu 150
1
.9
.8
8
x 250A I Ics=10
Ue(V)
220/240
380/415
150
130
∅5...8
x 250A auto O push
ON cat A 440
500
70
20
100
600/690
manu OFF -2 UNE
NEMA
0 250 D
push IEC947
VDE
BS CEI
125/16
250
cat A TM Icu C
100%
UTE push Ics = 250A/40°
to VDE
UTE
trip 947-2UNE NEMA
auxiliary contacts auxiliary contacts and motor mechanism.

IEC
CEI
BS
5
Im 10
6
Ir 9
Im
1
7
Ir
1
.9
.8
8
x 250A I
x 250A auto O push
ON
manu OFF
push
and motor mechanism Trip unit with the COM option.
: hard wire
: communication bus Compact with
communicating SC150
auxiliaries
Device identification
Address b b
Rating - -
Indication of status conditions
OF (on/off) b b
SD (trip indication) b b
SDE (fault-trip indication) b b
CE/CD (connected/disconnected position) b b
Controls
ON/OFF b b
LED reset b b
Protection settings
Reading of the protection settings b
Operating and maintenance aids
Measurements: currents b
Fault readings: type of fault b
Indications: operation counter b b
characteristics Compact NS630b to 1600
COM option in Compact
The COM option is required for integration For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:
of the circuit breaker or switch- b a "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit
disconnector in a supervision system. and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually
operated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices) and its
Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module.
communications protocol for full For withdrawable circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:
compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic b a "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit
electrical-installation management and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually
systems. An external gateway is available operated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices) and its
kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module
for communication on other networks: b a "chassis" communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors
b Profibus (CE, CD and CT contacts).
b Ethernet… Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication
The eco COM is limited to the transmission contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses.
of metering data and does not allow the Digipact or Modbus "device" communication module
This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information
control of the circuit breaker.
on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control
unit and the communication module.
056431
Digipact "device" Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.

communication module.
Digipact or Modbus "chassis" communication module
This module is independent of the control unit. The Modbus "chassis"
communication module makes it possible to address the chassis and to maintain
the address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
Communicating motor-mechanism module
A bus link is used to transmit remote ON/OFF orders to the circuit breaker.
A communicating motor-mechanism module must be used.
The remote-tripping function (MX or MN) is independent of the communication option.
E59437A
Communication Communication
bus bus
056401
Digipact "chassis"
communication module
OF
SD OF
SDE SDE
3 3
1 1 5
I on
tripped
reset
F
0 OF
Manually operated Electrically operated

056431
Modbus "device" fixed device fixed device

Communication Communication
bus ++ bus ++
CCM
modb
us
2 CCM
modb
us
2
+ +
CE
CE
CD
CD
CT
CT
C 4 C 4
C CT C CT
CE C CE
CD OF CD
OF
SD SDE
SDE 3 3
1 5
1
E45183
Modbus "chassis"

drawout device drawout device
1 "device" communication module 4 CE, CD and CT "chassis" sensors

2 "chassis" communication module 5 communicating motor-mechanism module
3 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors
Note. eco COM

The eco COM Modbus is intended to fit the circuit breaker with a module display (DMB300,
DMC300…).
Compact circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are compatible with the

E47071
POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo

FileEdit View Setup Control Display Reports Tools Window Help
Sampling Mode : MANUAL 5 seconds Digipact or Modbus COM option.
The COM option may be used with all types of control units to:
Time Event Module b identify the device
Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis
b indicate status conditions
Phase 1-N
1,20
Harmonics(RMS)
b control the device.
1,00
Fundamental:
RMS:
H1: 118.09
H2: 0.01
H3: 0.45
H4: 0.03
Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option
RMS-H:
H5: 0.45
H6: 0.04
H7: 1.27
also offers:
0,80 Peak: H8: 0.05
H9: 0.42
b setting of the protections functions
% Fundamental
CF: H10: 0.01

H11: 1.03
THD: H12: 0.07
0,60 b analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance
OK
0,40
purposes
0,20
Switch-disconnector with Circuit breaker with
0,00
H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 communication bus communication bus
Harmonics
Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus
Ready ONLINE: DEMO No working system 9:30
Address b b S A S A
Rating - - A A
Type of device - -
Type of control unit - - A A
Type of long-time rating plug - - A A
Status indications
OF (on/off) b b S A S A
SD (trip indication) b b S A S A
SDE (fault-trip indication) b b S A S A
CE/CD (connected/ b b S A S A
disconnected position)
Controls
MX/XF ON/OFF b b S A S A
Spring charging - -
Reset of the mechanical - -
indicator
Protections settings
Reading of protections settings A A
Measurements
current A A
Fault readings
type of fault A
Note.
S = Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0
A = Micrologic with ammeter
See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.
characteristics Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Compact in a communication network
E94525
Software
Communication
interface RS 232C, Ethernet
RS 485
Communication
bus
IN JBus
LIN GER
MERSV
pulsar BBus
com
com error
24V
Data concentrator
OK
error
1 3
DC150
N°1
N°1
Device
Digipact Bus Modbus Bus
Compact Compact
Devices
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units may be connected to either
a Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available
depends on the type of Micrologic control unit (S, A) and on the type of
communication bus (Digipact or Modbus).
Switch-disconnectors may be connected exclusively to the Digipact communication
bus.
Communication bus
Digipact bus
The Digipact bus is the internal bus of the low-voltage switchboard in which the
Digipact communicating devices are installed (Compact with Digipact COM,
PM150, SC150, UA150, etc.). This bus must be equipped with a DC150 data
concentrator (see the Powerlogic System catalogue).
Addresses
Addressing is carried out by the DC150 data concentrator.
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Digipact bus is
calculated in terms of “communication points”. These points correspond to the
amount of traffic the bus can handle. The total number of points for the various
devices connected to a single bus must not exceed 100.
If the required devices represent more than 100 points, add a second Digipact
internal bus.
Communicating device Number of points
DC150 data concentrator 4
Micrologic + Digipact COM 4
PM150 4
SC150 4
UA150 4
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Digipact internal bus is 200 meters.
Bus power source
Power is supplied by the DC150 data concentrator (24 V).
Modbus bus
The Modbus RS 485 (JBus) system is an open bus on which communicating
Modbus devices (Compact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) are
installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus.
Addresses
The software layer of the Modbus protocol can manage up to 255 addresses (1 to 255).
The “device” communication module comprises three addresses linked to:
b circuit-breaker manager
b measurement manager
b protection manager.
The “chassis” communication module comprises one address linked to:
b the chassis manager.
The division of the system into four managers secures data exchange with the
supervision system and the circuit-breaker actuators.
The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit-breaker address
@xx entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47).
logic addresses
@xx Circuit-breaker manager (1 to 47)
@xx + 50 Chassis manager (51 to 97)
@xx + 200 Measurement manager (201 to 247)
@xx + 100 Protection manager (101 to 147)
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus
depends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam,
Vigilohm, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of data
exchanged and the desired response time. The RS 485 physical layer offers up to
32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).
A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the
device).
A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on the
device and on the chassis).
The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices.
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters.
Bus power source
A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20 % ripple, insulation class II).
Communication interface
The Modbus bus may be connected to the central processing device in any of
three manners:
b direct link to a PLC. The communication interface is not required if the PLC is
equipped with a Modbus port;
b direct link to a computer. The Modbus (RS 485) / Serial port (RS 232)
communication interface is required;
b connection to a TCP/IP (Ethernet) network. The Modbus (RS 485) / TCP/IP
(Ethernet) communication interface is required.
Software
To make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, software
with a Modbus driver must be used.
Micrologic utilities
This is a set of Modbus drivers that may be used with a PC to:
b display the variables (I, U, P, E, etc.) with the RDU (Remote Display Utility)
b read/write the settings with the RSU (Remote Setting Utility)
b remotely control (ON / OFF) the device with the RCU (Remote Control Utility)
These utilities are available on request.
System Manager Software (SMS)

SMS is a power management software for the control and monitoring of LV and MV
electrical installations.
The SMS family includes a number of products for all types of applications, from
standalone systems to networked power management of multiple buildings.
SMS can communicate with all intelligent devices of the electrical installation
including:
b Power Meter and Circuit Monitor products
b LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
b Sepam units.
characteristics Compact NS1600b to 3200
COM option in Compact
The COM option is required for integration For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:
of the circuit breaker or switch- b a "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit
and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts).
disconnector in a supervision system.
Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication
Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus
contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses.
communications protocol for full
Digipact or Modbus "device" communication module
compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information
electrical-installation management on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control
systems. An external gateway is available unit and the communication module.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
for communication on other networks:
b Profibus
E59438
b Ethernet… Communication
bus
056431
Digipact "device"
communication module.
OF
SD
SDE
2
1 OFF
OFF
COM
module
056431
Modbus "device"
communication module 1 "Device" communication module
2 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors
Compact circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are compatible with the

E47071
POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo

FileEdit View Setup Control Display Reports Tools Window Help
Sampling Mode : MANUAL 5 seconds Digipact or Modbus COM option.
The COM option may be used with all types of control units to:
Time Event Module b identify the device
Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis
b indicate status conditions
Phase 1-N
1,20
Harmonics(RMS)
b control the device.
1,00
Fundamental:
RMS:
H1: 118.09
H2: 0.01
H3: 0.45
H4: 0.03
Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option
RMS-H:
H5: 0.45
H6: 0.04
H7: 1.27
also offers:
0,80 Peak: H8: 0.05
H9: 0.42
b setting of the protections functions
% Fundamental
CF: H10: 0.01

H11: 1.03
THD: H12: 0.07
0,60 b analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance
OK
0,40
purposes
0,20
Switch-disconnector with Circuit breaker with
0,00
H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 communication bus communication bus
Harmonics
Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus
Ready ONLINE: DEMO No working system 9:30
Address b b S A S A
Rating - - A A
Type of device - -
Type of control unit - - A A
Type of long-time rating plug - - A A
Status indications
OF (on/off) b b S A S A
SD (trip indication) b b S A S A
SDE (fault-trip indication) b b S A S A
Protections settings
Reading of protections settings A A
Measurements
current A A
Fault readings
type of fault A
Note.
See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.
Functions and Electrical and mechanical
characteristics accessories
Compact NS80H-MA
E58516
Sealable terminal
shield
Direct rotary
handle
Auxiliary
com
pact
H-M
A
NS 80 Uimp 8kV
Ui75
0V.
Ue (V)
.
Icu (kA)
100
contact
70
220/240 65
380/415 25 ON
440 6
500/525 10 I
660/690
250
cat A Icu
100%
Ics =
DIN-rail
push
to
2 UNE
947. BS CEI trip
IEC
VDE
UTE
plate
push O
to
trip OFF
1
2
push
to
trip
ON
I
ed
tripp ∅5...8
Voltage release
C2
SHT z
C1
MX/
/50-60H
240V
220-
t
rese
O
OFF
Sealable terminal Extended rotary

shield handle
Auxiliary
contact
Compact NSC100N, NSA160
Front accessory for NSC100N (45 mm standard door cutout)
E58517
pact
com
125E .
NSA p 6kV
V. Uim (kA)
U 500 Icu
25
Ue (V) 16
220/240 10
380/415 5
440
125
Icu
50%
Ics =
UNE
947.2 CEI
IEC VDE BS
UTE
45 mm front
E58518
Sealable terminal
shield
com
NSA
pact
125E
p 6kV
.
Auxiliary
contact
V. Uim (kA)
U 500 Icu
25
Ue (V) 16
220/240 10
380/415 5
440
125
Icu
Ics = 50%
UNE
947.2 CEI
IEC VDE BS
UTE
ON
I
ed
tripp ∅5...8
C1
MX/
C2
SHT z
Voltage release Extended rotary
220-
240V
/50-60H
rese
t
O
handle
OFF
Sealable terminal
shield
Compact NS80H-MA,
NSC100N and NSA160
Installation
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N circuit breakers may be mounted vertically,
E59278
horizontally or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics. They are
designed for easy installation in the various types of switchboards of each market
and country.
Mounting on a DIN rail is possible using a special adapter.
The NSA160 circuit breaker may be mounted exclusively on a DIN rail.
Installation positions
These three circuit breakers are available in the fixed, front-connection version.
E43597
E43596
E43595 OFF
push
to
trip
NS80H-MA and NSC100N: NS80H-MA and NSC100N: Standard 45 mm front,

mounting on backplate or mounting on DIN rail optional on NSC100N,
mounting plate. (optional). standard on NSA160.
NSA160: mounting on DIN
rail (standard).
E54455
Front connection of bare cables

Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and NSA160 circuit
E39432
breakers are equipped as standard with connectors
for bare copper or aluminium cables from 1.5 to
70 mm2.
Distribution connector
This connector screws directly to the standard
connectors. It is used to connect up to three cables: Distribution connector
b flexible cables from 1 to 10 mm2
b rigid cables from 1.5 to 16 mm2
b with crimped or self-crimping ferrules from 1.5 to
4 mm2.
Insulation of live parts

Terminal shields
E58553
Insulating accessories used for protection against

direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection
IP40, IK07). They are supplied with sealing
accessories.
For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory.
Terminal shields
044314
Indication contacts
A single type of contact, complying with the IEC 60947-5 international
recommendation, provides different indication functions, depending on where it is
inserted in the device.
b OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
b SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
v an overload
v a short-circuit
v an earth-leakage fault (Compact NSC100N and NSA160)
v operation of a voltage release.
Indication contacts Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
b SDV (earth-leakage fault indication) - inserted in the Vigi module on Compact
Common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuit-
NSC100N and NSA160 devices, it indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due
breaker status information. They can be used for indications,
electrical locking, relaying, etc.
to an earth fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
All the above auxiliary contacts are also available in “low-level” versions capable of
switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).
Characteristics
Contacts Standard Low level
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V 2 mA at 15 V DC
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
054550
Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.
This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a
tripping threshold:
b tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage
b circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated
voltage.
Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
MX or MN voltage release
Time-delay unit for an MN release (Compact NS80H-MA)
Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting y 200 ms:
It is used in conjunction with:
b a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC
b a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.
MX shunt release
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.
Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.
Operation
When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be
reset locally.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,
is not possible.
Mechanical characteristics
b endurance is equal to 50 % of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker
b the releases clip in behind the front cover
b connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2 to integrated terminal blocks.
b consumption:
v pick-up (MX): < 5 VA
v seal-in (MN): < 5 VA
b response time: < 50 ms.
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and
NSA160 (cont.)
Rotary handles
054558
There are two types of rotary handle:

b direct rotary handle
b extended rotary handle.
There are two models:
b standard with a black handle
b VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control.
Direct rotary handle (NS80H-MA and NSC100N)
Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
The direct rotary handle maintains:
b visibility of and access to trip unit settings
Compact NS80H-MA with a direct rotary handle b suitability for isolation
b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
b access to the “push to trip” button
b circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,
shackle diameter Ø 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
054563
It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover.

Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:
b motor control centre (MCC) switchboards:
v door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON
v circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open
b a higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07)
b machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK08.
Extended rotary handle
This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
switchboards, from the switchboard front.
It maintains:
b suitability for isolation
b access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open
Compact NS80H-MA with an extended rotary handle shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked.
The extended rotary handle is made up of:
b a unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)
b an assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
b an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance (min/max distance
between back of circuit breaker and door is 185/600 mm).
Locking systems
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters
ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
E58552
Toggle locking using a removable device
Outgoing-circuit identification
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N devices come with clip-in labels for hand-
written indications.
It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels (part number AB1-** (8 digits).
E18595
.P
DE P
P O
D E P. P O M push
to
trip
Identification accessories
Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version)
E58523
Sealable terminal
shield
que
Voltage-presence
diélectri rnes
test
avant ce cache-bo
enlever c test
dielectri shield
before terminal
this
L3
remove L2
L1
z
50/60H
0V -
indicator
220/60
Rear connector
Connectors
One-piece
spreader
Interphase barriers
2
arged
disch
compa L
0
ct
NS25 Uimp 8kV.

O OFF
Ui 750V. Icu(kA)
Ue(V) 150
0 150
220/245
380/41
440
130
70 ∅5...8
20
500 0
ON 600/69 100
250
I cat A
100%
Icu
Ics =
VDE
UTE
947-2UNE NEMA
IEC
CEI
BS
1
I
∅5..
.8 auto O push
ON
OFF
push
manu
ct
compa L
0
pact ON NS25 Uimp 8kV.
Ui 750V. Icu(kA)
com
50NH I Ue(V) 150
reset
0
NB2 . Uimp 8kV. 220/245 150
130
380/41
Ui 750V Icu 440
70
(kA) 20
Motor-mechanism
500 0
Ue
(V) 100
600/69
250
100
push
to
O
220/2
40
15
70
65
cat A
Ics =
100%
Icu trip OFF
380/4 UTE
VDE
50 947-2UNE NEMA
440 IEC
CEI
25 10 BS
500/5
90
module
85
660/6
250 Icu
Direct rotary
00%
Ics=1
cat A act
comp L
0
47-2 UNE
NEMA
D NS25 Uimp 8kV.
IEC9 BS CEI 160 TM 250 Ui 750V. Icu(kA)
UTE
VDE 125/ 250A/
40°C
push Ue(V) 0 150
reset
handle
to 220/245 150
trip 380/41 130
70
5 440
Im 10 20
500 0
6
600/69
250
100
push
to
O
OFF
Ir 9 cat A Icu trip
100%
7 Im Ics =
8 Ir UTE
VDE
.8 947-2UNE NEMA
1 x 250A IEC
BS
CEI
.9
x 250A
Rear insulating ON
I
screens Auxiliary contact

tripped ∅5..
.8
Extended rotary
reset
O
handle
OFF
Voltage release
80
40 120
0
A
test
enlever
diélectri
before this
que
diélectri le
avant ce couverc
c test
cover
Ammeter module
remove
vigi
NS 250 V-50/60
Hz
-25
200/525
310
5
50
∆t(ms)
60
0 H
vigiM
6
10 2 4
3
Current-transformer
1
I∆n(A)
0,3 t=0)
0,03(∆
HS
90 %Ir
160/25
0A
STR
22 SE
module
105 test
Im
5 alarm
Ir 4 6 + -
.9
Insulation-monitoring
0A 3
.85 .95
In=25 8 Ir Im
.8 2
.98 10
1.5
.7 xIr
1
.63
xIn
module
Trip unit
Sealable terminal
shield
Compact NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable versions)
E58715
Sealable terminal
shield
que
diélectri rnes
test
Voltage-presence
avant ce cache-bo
enlever c test
dielectri shield
before terminal
this
L3
remove L2
L1
z
50/60H
0V -
indicator
220/60
Terminal extensions and spreaders
Rear connectors
Connectors for
withdrawable One-piece Connectors
devices spreader
Interphase barriers
Plug-in base
2
arged
disch
compa L
0
ct
NS25 Uimp 8kV.

O OFF
Ui 750V. Icu(kA)
Ue(V) 150
0 150
220/245
380/41
440
130
70 ∅5...8
20
ON 500 0
600/69 100
I 250
cat A Icu
100%
Ics =
VDE
UTE
947-2UNE NEMA
IEC
CEI
BS
Control-wire
1
I
Chassis side ∅5..
.8
manu
auto O
push
OFF
push
ON
plate connection com

pact
50NH
NB2 . Uimp 8kV.
Ui 750V
ON
I
compa L
0
Ue(V)
220/245
380/41
ct
NS25 Uimp 8kV.
0
)
Ui 750V. Icu(kA
150
150
130 reset
plate
Icu 440
70
(kA) 20
500 0
Ue
100
600/69 100
push O
Motor-mechanism
(V) 250 to
40 70 cat A
OFF
1
Icu trip
2 220/2 Ics =
100%
15 65
3 380/4 UTE
VDE
50 947-2UNE NEMA
440 IEC
CEI
4 25 10 BS
5 500/5
90 85
6 660/6
module
250 Icu
Direct rotary
7 00%
8 Ics=1
9 cat A
act
comp L
0
47-2 UNE
NEMA
D NS25 Uimp 8kV.
IEC9 BS CEI 160 TM 250 Ui 750V. Icu(kA)
UTE
VDE 125/ 250A/
40°C
push Ue(V) 0 150
reset
150
handle
to 220/245
trip 380/41 130
70
5 440
Im 10 20
500 0
6
600/69
250
100
push
to
O
OFF
Ir 9 cat A Icu trip
100%
7 Im Ics =
8 Ir UTE
VDE
.8 947-2UNE NEMA
1 x 250A IEC
BS
CEI
.9
x 250A
ON
I
Auxiliary contact tripped ∅5..

.8
Extended rotary
Circuit-breaker
reset
O
handle
OFF
side plate Voltage release

Control-wire
connection
on chassis
80
40 120
0
A
test
avant ce couverc
enlever
diélectri
que
diélectri le
c test
cover
Ammeter module
before this
remove
vigi
NS 250 V-50/60
Hz
-25
200/525
310
5
50
∆t(ms)
60
0 H
vigiM
6
10 2 4
3
Current-transformer module
1
I∆n(A)
0,3 t=0)
0,03(∆
HS
0A
160/25 22 SE
STR
90 %Ir
105 test
Im
5 alarm
Ir 4 6 + -
Insulation-monitoring
.9 3
0A .85 .95
In=25 8 Ir Im
.8 2
.98 10
1.5
.7 xIr
1
.63
xIn
module
Trip unit
Sealable terminal
shield
Installation
045345
Fixed circuit breakers

Compact circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on their
back without any derating of characteristics. They are designed for easy installation
in the various types of switchboards of each market and country.
E58529
E58714
E58530
Fixed Compact NS250H
E59278
Mounting on a backplate Mounting on rails Mounting on DIN rail (with

(solid or slotted) adapter)
E18850
Mounting on a Prisma functional mounting plate.
Circuit breaker on a plug-in base

The plug-in configuration makes it
possible to:
b extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit
E21018
E21017
breaker without having to touch

connections
b allow for the addition of future circuits
E21019
at a later date.
041632
Mounting on a backplate Mounting through a front Mounting on rails

panel
Protection against direct contacts with power circuits

b circuit breaker plugged in = IP4
b circuit breaker removed = IP2
b circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters = IP4
Parts of a plug-in configuration
b Compact circuit breaker
Compact NS250H on a plug-in base b set of power connectors added to the circuit breaker
b plug-in base for mounting on a backplate or on rails
b insulating screen, for use when the circuit breaker is installed on a backplate with
E59279
front connections
b safety trip, installed on the circuit breaker, that causes automatic tripping if the
circuit breaker is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it. The safety trip does not
prevent circuit breaker operation, even when it has been removed.
b mandatory short terminal shields.
Installation positions Accessories
Insulating accessories can be used to:
b protect against direct contact
b increase insulation between phases.
b disconnected position - the power circuits Circuit breaker on a withdrawable chassis
are disconnected, but the circuit breaker is
E21282
still on the chassis and may still be operated
(ON, OFF, push-to-trip).
b the circuit breaker may be locked using
1 to 3 padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to Connected Disconnected Removed
8 mm), to prevent connection.
The chassis is made up of two side plates installed on the base and two other
b the auxiliaries can be tested (with manual
plates mounted on the circuit breaker.
auxiliary connector). Accessories
b auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part, indicating the “connected” and
“disconnected” positions
041879
b toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel,
intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit
breaker (supplied with a toggle extension)
b keylock which, depending on the bolt fitted, can be used to:
v prevent insertion for connection
v lock the circuit breaker in the connected or disconnected positions.
b telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles.
Compact NS250H on a withdrawable chassis

E59279
Front and rear connections

Fixed, plug-in and withdrawable Compact devices may all be equipped with front
and rear connections.
Fixed device
E58733
E58716
Front connection Rear connection
Plug-in and withdrawable devices

E58719
E58717
E58718
Front connection Rear connection Rear connection through

a backplate
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
E54456
Connection of fixed devices
E58534
Front connection of bars or cables
E58531
Right-angle terminal
with lugs extensions
The Compact NS100 to NS630 devices are equipped
as standard with terminals comprising snap-in nuts
with screws (M8 for NS100 to 250, M10 for NS400 to
E58535
630) for direct connection to insulated bars or cables
with lugs.
Additional terminal extensions (right-angle, edgewise,
spreaders) are available for all connection Straight terminal extensions
requirements. Spreaders (52.5 or 70 mm pitch) may for NS100 to 250
be fitted on the Compact NS400 to 630.
Lugs
Lugs are different for copper and aluminium cables.
They are supplied with interphase barriers and are
E58536
compatible with the long terminal shields.
b the small lugs for copper cables may be used for
cables with the following cross-sectional areas:
v 120, 150 or 185 mm2 (NS100 to 250) Edgewise terminal
v 240 or 300 mm2 (NS400 to 630). extensions for NS400 to 630
E58720
Crimping by hexagonal barrels or punching.

b the small lugs for aluminium cables may be used for
E58537
cables with the following cross-sectional areas:
v 150 or 185 mm2 (NS100 to 250)
v 240 or 300 mm2 (NS400 to 630).
Crimping by hexagonal barrels.
Spreaders
Spreaders increase the pitch of the terminals. Small lug for copper cables
They are not compatible with terminal shields on the
Compact NS100 to 250.
The one-piece spreader increases the pitch, thus
E58538
making it possible to use the connection accessories
of a larger device (e.g. a Compact NS100 to 250 can
be fitted with the accessories of a Compact NS400 to
630). The one-piece spreader also provides protection
against direct contact (see page 101).
E58532
Small lug for aluminium

cables
E58539
Spreaders
E58721
E58533
One-piece spreader
E54457
Front connection of bare cables
E54468
Bare-cable connectors for Compact NS devices may
be used for both copper and aluminium cables.
1-cable connectors for Compact NS100 to 250 1-cable connector
The connectors snap directly on to the device for NS100 to 250
terminals or clip onto right-angle and straight terminal
E58540
E54469
extensions as well as spreaders.
1-cable and 2-cable connectors for Compact
NS400 to 630 1-cable connector
The connectors are screwed to device terminals or for NS400 to 630
right-angle terminal extensions.
E54470
Distribution connectors for Compact NS100 to 250
These connectors are screwed directly to device
terminals. Interphase barriers are supplied with
distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long
terminal shields. Each connector can receive six
2-cable connector
cables with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to for NS400 to 630
35 mm2 each.
E54471
Polybloc distribution block for Compact NS100 to 630
E58722
The Polybloc connects directly to the device terminals

and is used to connect up to six or nine flexible or rigid
cables with cross-sectional areas not exceeding
10 mm2, to each pole. Connection is made to spring
terminals without screws.
for NS100 to 250
E54472
Polybloc distribution block

for NS100 to 250
Rear connection
E54456
E58724
Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are

available in two lengths. Bars may be positioned flat,
on edge or at 45° angles depending on how the rear
connections are positioned.
The rear connections are simply fitted to the device Two lengths
E58723
connection terminals. All combinations of rear

connection lengths and positions are possible on a
given device. The device is mounted on a backplate.
E58725
For the connection of cables without lugs, the 1-cable

connectors for Compact NS100 to 250 may be simply
clipped onto the rear connections.
Four positions
E58726
Connection
of bare cables
to NS100 to 250.
E54456
Connection of plug-in devices

Connection of bars or cables with lugs
The plug-in base is equipped with terminals which, depending on their orientation,
serve for front and rear connection. For rear connection of a base mounted on a
backplate, the terminals must be replaced by insulated, long right-angle terminal
extensions.
For Compact NS630 devices, connection most often requires the 52.5 or 70 mm
pitch spreaders.
Connection accessories
See the “Connection of fixed devices” section.
E58717
E58727
E58718
Front connection Front connection with Rear connection
spreaders
E58719
Rear connection of a base

mounted on a backplate
Connection of bare cables

E54457
All terminals may be equipped with bare-cable connectors. See the “Connection of
fixed devices” section.
E58729
E58728
Plug-in base for Compact Plug-in base for Compact

NS100 to 250 equipped with NS400 to 630 equipped with
1-cable connectors 2-cable connectors

056384
One-piece spreader
E58730
Connection of large cables may require an increase in
the distance between the device terminals. The one-
piece spreader is an accessory that can also be fitted
on Interpact INS switch-disconnectors. It offers the
following features:
b increases the pitch of the circuit-breaker terminals to
correspond to that of the next largest frame size
b compatible with all the connection accessories
available for the next largest frame size (connectors,
One-piece spreader
terminal extensions, etc.)
b enhances insulation between phases in comparison
with standard spreaders.
NS100 to 250 NS400 to 630
Pitch without 35 45
spreaders (mm)
Pitch with standard 45 52.5 or 70
spreaders (mm)
Pitch with one-piece 45 70
spreader (mm)
Mounting
When equipped with a one-piece spreader, Compact
NS circuit breakers may be installed either at the back
of a switchboard or on the front panel with a raiser.
b devices with different frame sizes can thus be
aligned in the switchboard
b the same mounting plate can be used for all devices
(including Interpact INS switch-disconnectors).
E58731
E58732
Connection and insulation

accessories are identical to
those for Interpact INS
Mounting at the back of a Mounting behind the front

switchboard panel with a raiser

049221
E58541
Terminal shields
Terminal shields are sealable insulating accessories
used for protection against direct contact with power
circuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07). They are
supplied with sealing accessories.
Terminal-shield selection
b fixed circuit breaker, front connection - long terminal
shields
b fixed circuit breaker, rear connection - short terminal
shields Terminal shields
b for voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory
b for voltages > 600 V, special connection kit with
terminal shields and insulating screens
b for Compact NS400 to 630 with spreaders, special
E58542
Compact NS equipped with terminal shields. terminal shields for spreaders
b for withdrawable circuit breaker (plug-in and chassis
type), short terminal shields on the device are
mandatory. Terminal shields on the base are possible.
Long terminal shields for plug-in bases are used to:
b protect against direct contact with power circuits
(degree of protection IP40, IK07)
b increase insulation between phases.
Insulating accessories for plug-in bases include:
b an adapter offering the same connection
possibilities as the circuit breaker Interphase barriers
b long terminal shields for the plug-in base.
Interphase barriers
Safety accessories for maximum insulation at the
E58543
power-connection points:
b they clip easily onto the circuit breaker
b not compatible with terminal shields
b special version for plug-in bases.
Rear insulating screens

Safety accessories for insulation between connections
and the backplate. Compatible with terminal shields or
interphase barriers.
Rear insulating screens

E28443
OF1 SD SDE OF2

Connection of electrical auxiliaries
Fixed configuration
MN/MX motor mechanism
OR Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover.
rotary handle
E18585
SDV
Compact NS100/160/250
E28444
OF1 OF2 OF3 SD SDE

Plug-in and withdrawable configurations
MN/MX motor mechanism

OR
E18586
rotary handle
SDV
Automatic auxiliary connectors

Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary
connectors (nine wires each). These are made up of:
b a moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per
circuit breaker)
b a fixed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare
cables up to 2.5 mm2.
Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors.
For Compact NS400 to 630, connection wires for the options installed with trip unit
STR53UE also exit via the automatic auxiliary connectors.
E21397
E21398
connector 2 connector 3
connector 1 OF2/SDV OF3/SDV
connector 2 COM
OF1 SDE/MT connector 1 OF2
SD MT OF1 T
SDE/MT
MN/MX SD MT
MN/MX
Compact NS100 to 250 Compact NS400 to 630
Manual auxiliary connector for withdrawable configurations
Withdrawable circuit breakers may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine
wires each. In “disconnected” position, the auxiliaries remain connected and can
therefore be tested by operating the circuit breaker.
E18587
Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with Nine-wire manual auxiliary
numbered terminals for connection of wires up to: connector
b 1.5 mm2 for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases
b 2.5 mm2 for the motor-mechanism module.

044314
Indication contacts
Common-point changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status
information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.
Functions
b OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
v an overload
v a short-circuit
v an earth-leakage fault
Changeover contacts v operation of a voltage release
v operation of the “push to trip” button
v disconnection when the device is ON.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available
b SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
in “low-level” versions capable of switching very low
v an overload
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic
v a short-circuit
circuits).
v an earth-leakage fault.
b SDV (Earth-leakage fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has
tripped due to an earth fault.
b CAM (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the rotary
handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break)
or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (early make)
b CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) - microswitch type carriage switches
for withdrawable circuit breakers
Installation
b OF, SD, SDE and SDV functions - a single type of contact provides all these
different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The
contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker (or the Vigi
module for the SDV function).
The SDE function on a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit
requires the SDE actuator.
b CAM function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended).
b CE / CD (connected/disconnected) function - two parts must be fitted on the fixed
and moving parts of the chassis.
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -

Rotary handles
045349

Direct rotary handle

Compact NS250L with a direct rotary handle The direct rotary handle maintains:
044316

b access to the “push to trip” button
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
v door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON
v circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open

Compact NS250L with an extended rotary handle Degree of protection IP 55, IK08.
This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
It maintains:
b an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance
between the back of circuit breaker and door is:
v 185 to 600 mm for Compact NS100 to 250
v 210 to 625 mm for Compact NS400 to 630.
For withdrawable configurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with a
telescopic shaft with two stable positions.

044313
Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.
This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a
tripping threshold:
b tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage
b circuit breaker closing is possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated
voltage.
For a lower value, circuit breaker closing cannot be guaranteed.
MX or MN voltage release Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
Time-delay unit for an MN release
Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting 200 ms.
It is used in conjunction with:
b a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC
b a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.
MX shunt release
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.
Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.
Operation
When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be
reset locally.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,
is not possible.
Mechanical characteristics
b endurance is equal to 50 % of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker
b the releases clip in behind the front cover
b connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2, to integrated terminal blocks.
b consumption:
v pick-up (MX): < 10 VA
v seal-in (MN and MNR): < 5 VA.
b response time: < 50 ms.

047313
Motor-mechanism module
When equipped with a motor-mechanism module, Compact NS circuit breakers
feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation:
b all circuit-breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible,
including trip-unit settings and indications
b suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible
b double insulation of the front face.
Applications
b local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution control
b normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to
optimise energy costs
b load shedding and reconnection to optimise energy costs
b synchrocoupling.
Compact NS250H with motor mechanism Automatic operation
b circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained control
signals
1 2 3 4 5 6 b automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX),
with standard wiring
b mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault.
E21006
Manual operation
compact b transfer to manual mode using a switch (9) with possibility of remote mode
NS400 H 2
Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV.
Ue Icu
indication
(V)
220/240
(kA)
100 b circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons
380/415 70
440
500/525
65
50 b recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 9 times
600/690 20
b padlocking in OFF position.
cat A
O OFF charged
Ics = 100% Icu
IEC 947-2
UTE VDE BS CEI
All installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities are
UNE NEMA
In = 400A maintained.
Motor-mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to
integrated terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm2.
manu auto O I 1 Accessories
push OFF push ON
b keylock for locking in OFF position
b operations counter for the Compact NS400 and NS630, indicating the number of
ON and OFF cycles. The counter must be installed on the front of the motor-
mechanism module.
10 9 8 7
Characteristics
Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630
1 contact position indicator (suitability for isolation) Response time (ms) opening < 600
2 outgoing-circuit identification labels closing < 80
3 spring status indicator (charged, discharged) Rate cycles/minute max. 4
4 locking device (keylock) Control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60
5 locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks, 110/130 - 250
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130
6 manual spring-charging lever 220/240 - 380/440
7 I (ON) pushbutton Consumption (1) DC (W) opening y 500
8 O (OFF) pushbutton closing y 500
9 manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this AC (VA) opening y 500
switch can be indicated remotely closing y 500
10 operations counter (Compact NS400/630)
Electrical endurance
Circuit breaker + motor-mechanism module, in thousands of operations
(IEC 60947-2), at 440 V.
E21300
50
40
30 NS100
20 NS160
15
10 NS250
6 NS400
4 NS630
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 1 I/In
(1) For NS100/250, motor "vibratory" type consider inrush

current as 2 In during 10 ms cycling.

Indications and measurement

048287
Voltage presence indicator

The indicator detects and indicates that circuit breaker terminals are supplied with
power.
Installation
b in the long or short terminal shields, via the knockouts
b not compatible with the motor-mechanism module
b upstream or downstream of the circuit breaker
b degree of protection IP40, IK04.
Operates on all networks with voltages ranging from 220 to 550 V AC.
Current-transformer module
This module enables direct connection of a measurement device such as an
ammeter or a Digipact power meter (not supplied).
Compact NS630L with voltage-presence indicator Installation
b directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals
b degree of protection IP40, IK04
b class II insulation between front and the power circuits
041892
b connection to 6 integrated connectors for cables up to 2.5 mm2.

b transformer with 5 A secondary winding.
b accuracy class 3 for the following output-power consumptions:
v rating 100 A: 1.6 VA
v rating 150 A: 3 VA
v rating 250 A: 5 VA
v rating 400/630A: 8 VA.
Ammeter and Imax ammeter modules

Ammeter module
Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the current of each phase (selection of
phases by 3-position switch in front).
Imax ammeter module
Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the maximum current flowing in the
middle phase. The Imax value can be reset on the front.
Installation
Compact NS630H with current-transformer module b identical for both types of ammeter module
b ammeter clips into module in any of four 90° positions, i.e. can be installed of
devices mounted both vertically and horizontally
045212
b degree of protection IP40, IK04

b class II insulation between front and the power circuits.
b ammeter module: accuracy class 4.5
b Imax ammeter module:
v accuracy ±6 %
v maximum currents are displayed only if they last at least 15 minutes.
Compact NS250L with ammeter module

Insulation-monitoring module
041896
This module detects and indicates an insulation drop on a load circuit (TN-S or TT
systems).
Operation is identical to that of a Vigi module, but without circuit-breaker tripping.
Indication by a red LED in front.
An auxiliary contact may be installed for remote insulation-drop indications.
Installation
b degree of protection: IP40, IK04
b double insulation of the front face.
b settings: 100, 200, 500 and 1000 mA
b accuracy: -50 +0 %
b time delay following drop: 5 to 10 seconds
b AC-system voltage: 200 to 440 V AC and 440 to 550 V AC.
Compact NS250H with insulation-monitoring module
Communication
053172
Communicating versions of the auxiliary contacts and the motor-mechanism

module also exist for integration in a Digipact communications system. They simply
replace the standard electrical auxiliaries.
Using the STR53UE and STR43ME trip units equipped with the COM
communications option, it is possible to transmit data to Digipact modules:
b settings
b rms values of phase and neutral currents
b current of the most heavily loaded phase
b overload alarm in progress
b tripping cause (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts
and motor-mechanism module
054481
Withdrawable Compact NS equipped with communicating

auxiliary contacts

Locking systems
Control device Function Means Required
accessories
Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable device
lock in OFF or padlock fixed device
ON position
Direct rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
keylock locking
device + keylock
MCC rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
Rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position, keylock keylock
door opening prevented
Motor mechanism lock in OFF position, padlock
motor mechanism keylock locking device
locked out (keylock incorporated)
E58544
E58545
E18620
ON
I
pr
of
al
ux
O
OFF
Locking of the toggle using a Locking of the toggle using a Locking of the rotary handle
removable device fixed device using a padlock or a keylock.

048803
Individual enclosures
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS devices with two, three or four poles may be
installed in individual enclosures.
All fixed, front connections are possible, except right-angle and edgewise terminal
extensions. Spreaders may be installed in the enclosures intended for Interpact
Compact and Vigicompact NS250 to 630 devices.
There are two models of enclosures:
b heavy-duty metal individual enclosure, with:
v metal enclosure
v door with keylock and cut-out for rotary handle
v direct rotary handle (CNOMO, IP55, IK08)
v device mounting plate
v removable plate (without holes) for cable entry through bottom
b heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure, with:
v insulating enclosure
v transparent cover, screwed, lead sealable, with cut-out for rotary handle
v extended rotary handle
v device mounting plate
v removable plates (without holes) for cable entry through bottom and/or top.
Dimensions (W x H x D in mm)
b metal enclosures: W D
Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure for Compact NS v Compact NS100 to 160: 300 x 400 x 200
v Vigicompact NS100 to 160: 400 x 500 x 200
E44458
v Compact NS250 to 400: 400 x 600 x 200
v Compact NS630: 600 x 800 x 275
b insulating enclosures: H
v Compact/Vigicompact NS100 to 160: 270 x 360 x 235
v Compact NS250: 270 x 540 x 235
v Compact NS400 to 630: 360 x 720 x 235

Escutcheons
E21265
Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the
switchboard door. They increase the degree of
protection to at least IP40, IK07.
E23935
E23936
E23938
ON
I
O
OFF
push
to
trip
Front-panel escutcheons for Toggle cover Front-panel escutcheon for

toggle and Vigi module b degree of protection IP43, rotary handle.
(NSA160). Secures to the IK07 Secures to the panel by four
panel, from the front. b fits on the front of the screws, from the front.
circuit breaker. For circuit breaker with motor
mechanism and Vigi module,
use the protection collar for
front panel mounting (see
below).
E22039
80
40 120
0
A
Front-panel escutcheons for

ammeter module. Secures to
the panel by four screws,
from the front.
E21267
Protection collar for toggle and Vigi

module on withdrawable devices
Protection collars maintain the degree of protection,
whatever the position of the device (connected,
disconnected).
b front-panel escutcheons are mandatory (same as
those for rotary handles and ammeter modules)
b collars are mounted on the device using two screws
b escutcheons are attached to the switchboard
b a toggle extension is supplied with the collar.
For the insulation-monitoring module, use the same
elements as for the Vigi module.
Front-panel escutcheons for motor mechanism,
rotary handles, ammeter modules
Same as for fixed devices.

Outgoing-circuit identification
Compact NS100 to 630 devices come with clip-in labels for hand-written indications.
It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels part number AB1-**:
v Compact NS100 to 250: 8 digits
v Compact NS400 to 630: 16 digits.
E18595
.P
DE P
P O
D E P. P O M push
to
trip
Identification accessories
Sealing accessories
This option includes the elements required to fit lead seals to prevent:
b front removal
b rotary-handle removal
b opening of the motor-mechanism module
b access to auxiliaries
b access to trip-unit settings
b trip-unit removal
b access to earth-leakage protection settings
b terminal-shield removal
b access to power connections.
E18596
Sealing accessories

(fixed version)
E59224
Sealable terminal
shield
Terminal extension for

cables with lugs
Interphase barriers
Connection kit
for connectors Vertical connection
adapter
Spreader
Phase
barriers
Rear connectors Spreader
Auxiliary contact
Voltage release
I on
I ON
push
Manual control with

O OFF
push
d
trippe
O OFF
disch
arged
front connection reset

F
0 OF
I on
Manual control with

012
53
rear connection trippe
d
reset
0 OF
F
Direct rotary
handle
Electrical control with
mixed connection
tripped
reset
Extended rotary
handle
Communications
module
Connection kit
for connectors
Sealable terminal
shield
Escutcheon

(withdrawable version)
E59225
Terminal extention for

Interphase barriers cables with lugs
Vertical connection
adapter
Spreader
Rear connectors
Spreader
Auxiliary contact
Voltage release
Chassis with front or
rear connection
I on
O OFF
I
push
ON
Manual operation
push
d
trippe
arged
disch
O OFF
reset
F
I on 0 OF
d
012
53 trippe
reset
0 OF
F Direct rotary
handle
Electrical operation
tripped
reset
Communications
module Extended rotary
handle
Escutcheon Transparent cover

Installation
E45151
Fixed configuration
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers may be installed vertically, horizontally
or flat on their back.
E59226A
E59227A
Fixed Compact NS800H
E59278
Mounting on a backplate Mounting on rails
The withdrawable configuration makes it Withdrawable configuration

possible to: Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.
b extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit
breaker without having to touch
connections;
E59229A
E59228A
b allow for the addition of future circuits at

a later date.
E45176
Mounting on a backplate Rear mounting on rails

E59230
E59231
Withdrawable Compact NS800H

E59281A
Device on mounting plate Device on rails

E59232A
The device may be in one of four positions
on the chassis:
b connected position. The power circuits
and auxiliary contacts are all connected
b test position. The power circuits are Connected Test Disconnected Removed
disconnected. The auxiliary contacts are
The multifunctional chassis for Compact NS630b to 1600 devices is particularly
still connected and the device can be
suited for incoming circuit breakers. Features include:
operated electrically b device connection and disconnection through a door, using a crank that can be
b disconnected position. The power circuits stored in the chassis
and auxiliary contacts are all disconnected, b three positions (connected, test and disconnected) that are indicated:
v locally by a position indicator
however the device is still mounted on the
v remotely by carriage switches (3 for the connected position, 2 for the
chassis. It can be operated manually (ON, disconnected position and 1 for the test position)
OFF, "push to trip"). b circuit-breaker ON/OFF commands through a switchboard front panel.
b removed position. All circuits are Locking
disconnected. The device simply rests on There are extensive locking possibilities:
b chassis locking in connected, disconnected and test positions using three
the chassis rails and can be removed.
padlocks and two keylocks, on the switchboard front panel
b door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in connected position)
b racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open)
b locking in each of the connected, disconnected and test positions during device
connection or disconnection. Continuation to the next position requires pressing a
release button to free the crank.
Other safety function
Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics.
E59267A
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
9
10
2
1 mismatch protection
2 door interlock
3 racking interlock
4 keylock locking
5 padlock locking
6 position indicator
7 chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed)
8 crank entry
9 reset button
10 crank storage

Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Compact NS630b to 1600 fixed and Types of connection

withdrawable devices can be connected
using: Front connection
b horizontal or vertical rear connections
b front connections
E59235
b mixed connections
b a combination of front and rear
connections.
Rear connection
Horizontal Vertical
E59234A
E59233A
Simply turn a horizontal rear connector 90° to make it a vertical connector.
Combination of front and rear connections

E59237
E59236
Note.
Compact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with
bare-copper, tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors,
requiring no particular treatment.

Front connection of fixed devices
E54540
Bars
Fixed, front-connection Compact NS630b to 1600
E59235
E46426A
devices are equipped with terminals comprising
captive screws for direct connection of bars.
Other connection possibilities for bars include vertical-
connection adapters for edgewise bars and spreaders
to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm. Vertical-connection adapters
If the vertical connection adapters are front oriented,
then it is mandatory to install the arc chute screen in
order to comply with the safety clearances.
E46431A
E59238A
E59239A
Spreaders.
E59240A
E70750
Bare cables
E54457
Special sets of connectors and terminal shields may
E46887A
be used to connect up to four 240 mm2 copper or
aluminium cables for each phase.
E59241A
4-cable connectors
Cables with lugs

E54456
Cable lug adapters are combined with the vertical-

E46427A
connection adapters.
One to four cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm2) may
be connected.
To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned
between the terminal extensions. Cable lug adapters
If the cable lug adapters are installed over the top of
the arc chute chambers, then it is mandatory to install
the arc chute screen in order to comply with the safety
clearances.
E59242A
E70751
E59243A

Rear connection of fixed devices

E54540
Bars
Fixed, rear-connection Compact NS630b to 1600
E59236
devices equipped with horizontal or vertical connectors
E46431A
may be directly connected to flat or edgewise bars,
depending on the position of the connectors.
Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to
95 mm. Spreaders.
E59257A
E59248A
E59247A
E54456
Cables with lugs

Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four
E46427A
cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm2).

between the terminal extensions.
Cable lug adapters

E59249A
E59250A

Front connection of withdrawable devices
E54540
Bars
Withdrawable, front-connection Compact NS630b to
1600 devices are suitable for direct connection of bars.
E59280
E46426A
Other connection possibilities for bars include vertical-
connection adapters for edgewise bars and spreaders
to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.
Vertical-connection adapters
E59253A
E59252A
E46431A
Spreaders
E59254A
Cables with lugs

E46427A
E54456

Cable lug adapters

E59253A
E59255A

Rear connection of withdrawable devices

E54540
Bars
Withdrawable, rear-connection Compact NS630b to
E59282A
1600 devices equipped with horizontal or vertical
E46431A
connectors may be directly connected to flat or edge-
wise bars, depending on the position of the connectors.
Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to
95 mm. Spreaders
E59258A
E59259A
E59260A
E54456
Cables with lugs

E46427A

Cable lug adapters

E59261A
E59262A

Connection shield
E45190
Mounted on fixed, front-connection devices, this shield
E59263A
insulates power-connection points, particularly when
cables with lugs are used
Connection shield
Interphase barriers
These barriers are flexible insulated partitions used to
E79056
reinforce isolation of connection points in installations
with busbars, whether insulated or not.
Barriers are installed vertically between front or rear
connection terminals.
Interphase barriers for fixed

Compact NS equipped with connection shield device, front connection
E79057
Interphase barriers for fixed

device, rear connection
E59264A
Interphase barriers for

withdrawable device, rear
connection
Safety shutters
Mounted on the chassis, the safety shutters
E59265A
automatically block access to the disconnecting

contact cluster when the device is in the disconnected
or test positions (degree of protection IP20). When the
device is removed from its chassis, no live parts are
accessible.
The shutters can be padlocked (padlock not supplied) Safety shutters
to:
b prevent connection of the device
b lock the shutters in the closed position.

Connection of electrical auxiliaries

E59283A
Fixed devices
Connections are made directly to the auxiliaries once the front has been removed.
OF1
CAO1
CAO2
CAF1
CAF2
Wires exit the circuit breaker through a knock-out in the top.

OF2
OF3
rotary handle
E59286A
SD
COM MN
SDE
or
MX
Manually operated device

E59284A
Withdrawable devices
SDE
OF3
OF2
OF1
MN
ou
or Auxiliary circuits are connected to terminal blocks located in the top part of the
COM MX
chassis.
The auxiliary terminal block is made up of a fixed and moving part. The two parts
are in contact when the device is in the test and connected positions.
E59287A
Electrically operated device

E59285A
CD2
CD1
CE3
CE2
CE1
CT1
Withdrawable device

044314
Indication contacts
Contacts installed in the device
Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can
thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
Functions
b OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts
v an overload
OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts
v a short-circuit
v operation of a voltage release
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available v operation of the "push to trip" button
in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low v disconnection when the device is ON.
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
circuits). b SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
v an overload
v a short-circuit
b CAF / CAO (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the
rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early
break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (early make).
Installation
b OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different
indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The contacts
clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker
b CAF / CAO function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or
extended).
Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE/CAF/CAO auxiliary contacts
Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
056456
Connected, disconnected, test position carriage switches

A single type of changeover contact can be mounted optionally on the chassis to
indicate, depending on the slot where it is installed:
b the connected (CE) position
b the disconnected (CD) position. This position is indicated when the required
clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reached
b the test (CT) position. In this position, the power circuits are disconnected and
the auxiliary circuits are connected.
Installation
b contacts for the connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions clip
into the upper front section of the chassis.
Electrical characteristics of the CE/CD/CT auxiliary contacts
Carriage switches for connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and
test (CT) positions Contacts Standard Low level
Operational 24 V 8 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 8 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 8 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 8 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 8 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -

E45159
Rotary handles

The direct rotary handle maintains:
Compact NS with a direct rotary handle b suitability for isolation
b access to the "push to trip" button
E45161
v door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON;
v circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open;

Compact NS with an extended rotary handle This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
It maintains:
b an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance
between the back of circuit breaker and door is 218/605 mm.

Manually operated circuit breakers may be Remote tripping
equipped with an MX shunt release, an MN This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of:
undervoltage release or a delayed b a shunt release (MX)
undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). b or an undervoltage release (MN)
b or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit).
Electrically operated circuit breakers are These releases (MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus.
equipped as standard with a remote- The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an
operating mechanism to remotely open or emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker.
close the circuit breaker. An MX shunt Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
release or an MN undervoltage release
E59433A
E46554A
E46553A
(instantaneous or delayed) may be added. opening opening delayed
order order opening
order 10 12
056421
MX voltage release delay

unit
3 6
C2 D2 instantaneous
opening D2
order
MX MN MN
C1 D1 D1
Voltage releases (MX)

When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker.
A continuous supply of power to the MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF
position.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Permanent locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
Circuit-breaker response 50 ms ±10
time at Un
Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)

The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage
drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply
on the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or
electrically. Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main
contacts. Circuit-breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the
release returns to 85 % of its rated value.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
threshold closing 0.85 Un
MN consumption pick-up: 400 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
with delay unit (VA or W)
time at Un
MN delay units
To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of
the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external
delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable
and non-adjustable.
Characteristics
Power supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
V AC 50-60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Consumption of delay pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
unit alone (VA or W)
Circuit-breaker response non-adjustable 0.25 s
time at Un adjustable 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s

Electrically operated circuit breakers are Electrically operated circuit breaker

equipped as standard with a motor The motor mechanism module is used to remotely open and close the circuit
mechanism module. breaker. It is made up of a spring-charging motor equipped with an opening release
Two solutions are available for electrical and a closing release.
operation: An electrical operation function is generally combined with:
b device ON/OFF indication (OF)
b a point-to-point solution
b "fault-trip" indication (SDE).
b a bus solution with the COM
Wiring diagram of a point-to-point electrical operation solution
communication option.
E59434A
E45163
opening closing fault open closed

order order
A4 A2 B4 82 84 12 14
motor OF1
mechanism
module SDE
A1 81 11
Electrically operated Compact NS circuit breaker

Wiring diagram of a bus-type electrical operation solution
E59435A
opening closing
order order
A4 A2 B4
motor
mechanism
module
A1
COM
supervisor
OF
SDE
In the event of simultaneous opening and closing orders, the

mechanism discharges without any movement of the main
contacts.
In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the
standard electrical operation solution provides an anti-
pumping function by blocking the main contacts in open
position.

Motor mechanism module
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277- 380/415
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250
Consumption (VA or W) 180
Motor overcurrent 2 to 3 In for 0.1 second
Charging time maximum 4 seconds
Operating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute
Electrical closing order
The release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged.
Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (see
above), the operating threshold is from 0.85 to 1.1 Un and the circuit-breaker
response time at Un is 60 ms ±10.
The Compact NS electrical operation function can be used to implement a synchro-
coupling system.
Electrical opening order
The release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. The supply
can be impulse-type or maintained.
Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (see
above).

Locking on manually operated devices

E45194
Toggle locked by removable

padlocking device
accessories
lock in OFF or ON padlock fixed device
position
Direct rotary handle lock in padlock
b OFF position keylock locking
Rotary handle locked by a b OFF or ON position device + keylock
E45159
keylock CNOMO direct rotary handle lock in padlock

b OFF position keylock locking
b OFF or ON position device + keylock
Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position, padlock
door opening prevented keylock keylock
Locking in ON position does not prevent the device from tripping in the event of a fault or
remote tripping order.
Access to pushbuttons
Locking on electrically operated devices
056447
protected by transparent 1 reset of mechanical

cover trip indicator
E59436A
2 OFF pushbutton
3 OFF position locking
3 4 ON pushbutton
5 springs charged indication
6 pushbutton locking
7 contact position indication
1 8 operation counter
4
I
056446
Pushbutton locking using a 5

ON
push
O OFF
push
padlock disc
harg
ed
2 O OFF
6
7
53
012
Pushbutton locking
The transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close
OFF position locking using the device.
056448
padlocks It is possible to independently lock the opening OFF button and the closing ON
button.
The pushbuttons may be locked using either:
b three padlocks (not supplied)
b lead seal
b two screws.
Device locking in the OFF position

The circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the
opening pushbutton pressed down:
b using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied)
OFF position locking using a b using a keylock (supplied).
056449
keylock and padlocks Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks).
The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations:
b one keylock
b one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately
for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without lock) is available for installation of a keylock (Ronis, Profalux,
Kirk or Castell).

Chassis locking
1 mismatch protection
2 door interlock
3 racking interlock
E59267A
4 keylock locking
5 padlock locking
3 6 position indicator
7 chassis front plate
4 (accessible with cubicle
door closed)
5 8 crank entry
9 reset button
6 10 crank storage
7
8
1
9
10
2
Disconnected position locking

056450
056451
Mounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock
the circuit breaker in the disconnected position in two manners:
b using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied)
b using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options:
b one keylock
b one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately,
using the same key, for interlocking with another device
b one (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks
supplied separately, for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks
(Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell).
Disconnected position Disconnected position
locking by padlocks locking by keylocks
Connected, disconnected and test position locking
The connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator.
The racking crank blocks when the exact position is obtained.
056417
Door interlock
A release button is used to free it.
On request, the disconnected position locking system may be modified to lock the
circuit breaker in any of the three positions, connected, disconnected and test.
Door interlock
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position. It the
breaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be closed
without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
056452
Racking interlock
Racking interlock
This device prevents insertion of the crank when the cubicle door is open (device
cannot be connected).
Mismatch protection
Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one
on the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may
select.
056453
Mismatch protection

056463
Auxiliary terminal shield

Other accessories
Auxiliary terminal shield (CB)
Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the
terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.
Operation counter (CDM)

The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the
Operation counter
056464
front panel. It is compatible with electrically operated devices.
Escutcheon (CDP)
Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP40. It is available in fixed and withdrawable versions.
Transparent cover (CCP) for escutcheon

Escutcheon Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured
E45184
by a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP54 and the degree of

protection against mechanical impacts to IK10. It may be used for withdrawable
devices only.
Blanking plate (OP) for escutcheon

Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cutout of a cubicle not yet
equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and
withdrawable devices.
E45187
Transparent cover
E59987
Blanking plate

(fixed version)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

Installation
E45178

Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.
E59271A
OFF
OFF
Fixed Compact NS
Mounting on rails
Connection
E59281A
Front connection
NS1600 to 2500 NS3200
E59726A
E59272A
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
Bars
Bars may be directly connected to the terminals of Compact NS1600b to 3200
E59275A
circuit breakers.
NS1600b to 2500
E59273
OFF
OFF
NS1600b to 2500 with connection for vertical-connection adapters or NS3200

E59274A
E59727A
E59728A
OFF OFF
OFF OFF

Indication contacts
044314
Contacts installed in the device

Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can
thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
Functions
b OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts
v an overload
OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts v a short-circuit
v an earth-leakage fault
v operation of a voltage release
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available v operation of the "push to trip" button
in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic b SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
circuits). v an overload
v a short-circuit
Installation
b OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different
indication functions, depending on the position where it is inserted in the device.
The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker.
Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE auxiliary contacts
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -

Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers Remote tripping
may be equipped with an MX shunt release, This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of:
an MN undervoltage release or a delayed b a shunt release (MX)
undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). b or an undervoltage release (MN)
b or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit).
These releases (MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus.
056421
MX voltage release The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an
emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker.
Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
E59433A
E46554A
E46553A
opening opening delayed
order order opening
order 10 12
delay
unit
3 6
C2 D2 instantaneous
opening D2
order
MX MN MN
C1 D1 D1
Voltage releases (MX)

When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker.
A continuous supply of power to the MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF
position.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Permanent locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un
time at Un
Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)

The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage
drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply
on the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or
electrically. Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main
contacts. Circuit-breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the
release returns to 85 % of its rated value.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
threshold closing 0.85 Un
MN consumption pick-up: 400 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
with delay unit (VA or W)
time at Un
MN delay units
To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of
the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external
delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable
and non-adjustable.
Characteristics
Power supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
V AC 50-60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Consumption of delay pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5
unit alone (VA or W)
Circuit-breaker response non-adjustable 0.25 s
time at Un adjustable 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s

62191
Device locking
accessories
lock in OFF or ON padlock fixed device
position
Interphase barriers
Compact NS with toggle locked using a fixed device and
These barriers are flexible insulated partitions used to reinforce isolation of
padlocks connection points in installations with busbars, whether insulated or not.
Barriers are installed vertically between front connection terminals.
62190
Escutcheon (CDP)
Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP40.
Compact NS with toggle locked using a removable device and

padlocks
E79056
Interphase barriers
E94383
Escutcheon

Test equipment

test equipment for STR electronic trip units
047035
Mini test kit

052172
The mini test kit is a portable unit requiring no external power supply, used to check
operation of the electronic trip unit and circuit-breaker tripping.
It connects to the test connector on the front of the circuit breaker.
Required power source: five 9 V alkaline batteries (not supplied).
Portable test kit

The portable test kit is used to check all aspects of the protection functions:
b long time protection
b short time protection
b instantaneous protection
Mini test kit Portable test kit b earth-fault protection.
Required power source: 110 or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

test equipment for Micrologic control units
Mini test kit
The autonomous hand-held mini test kit may be used to:
056466
b check operation of the control unit and the tripping and pole-opening system by
sending a signal simulating a short-circuit
b supply power to the control units for settings via the keypad when the circuit-
breaker is open (Micrologic P and H control units).
Required power source: standard LR6-AA battery.
Portable test kit

The portable test kit is may be used to check:
b the mechanical operation of the circuit breaker
b the electrical continuity of the connection between the circuit breaker and the
control unit
b operation of the control unit:
v display of settings
v operating tests on the ASIC electronic component
v automatic and manual tests on protection functions
v test on the zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) function
v inhibition of the earth-fault protection
v inhibition of the thermal memory.
Note.
These test kits are identical for all Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers and
Portable test kit all Masterpact NT and NW circuit breakers.
Required power source: 110 or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Functions and Display modules
characteristics
Perfectly integrated in the Compact DMB300 and DMC300 display modules use the power and communications
and Masterpact ranges, Display modules capabilities of the Micrologic control units to centralise the display of electrical
values, status conditions and alarms of one or more Compact
are designed for use with Micrologic control or Compact circuit breakers.
units to provide instant and highly intuitive The mounting and cabling system for the display modules ensures fast,
access to all the information provided by easy and reliable installation.
the circuit breakers, including device status, Start-up is immediate with no configuration or programming required.
current, voltage and power values, etc. Display modules are high-performance devices combining:
b simple and easy-to-read dials
b powerful and accurate digital processing.
057454
Their small size and extensive communications capabilities make for easy and
flexible installation and operation.
Display modules DMB300 DMC300

Associated circuit breakers
Type Compact or Masterpact equipped with
Micrologic control units
Number 1 to 4 1 to 16
Display
Screen type Black and white Colour, touch screen
DMB300 display module: basic and harmonic measurements Screen size 240 x 64 pixels 5“, 320 x 240 pixels
Entry 5 buttons Touch screen
Information displayed
Currents (per phase)
E79078
Currents I1, I2, I3, IN A P H A P H

Maximum current A P H A P H
Earth-fault and earth-leakage currents A P H A P H
Demand current P H P H
Maximum demand current P H P H
Total harmonic distortion (THD) H H
Maximum total harmonic distortion H H
Amplitudes of individual harmonics H
Waveform capture H
Voltages
Phase-to-phase voltages (U1-2, U2-3, U3-1) P H P H
Minimum/maximum phase-to-phase voltages P H P H
Phase-to-neutral voltages (V1-N, V2-N, V3-N) P H P H
Minimum/maximum phase-to-neutral voltages P H
Frequency P H P H
DMC300 display module: measurements, harmonic analysis, Voltage unbalance (% per phase) P H P H
diagnosis
Total harmonic distortion (% per phase) H H
Maximum total harmonic distortion (% per phase) H H
Amplitudes of individual harmonics H H
Power
Active (P), reactive (Q) and apparent (S) power P H P H
Power factor and cos P H P H
Maximum power (P, Q, S) P H P H
Demand power (P, Q, S) P H P H
Maximum demand power (P, Q, S) P H P H
Metering
Active, reactive and apparent energy P H P H
On-line help
On-line help is available for each type
of information supplied by the module
Circuit-breaker diagnostics
Identification of control units A P H A P H
Reading of protections A P H A P H
Circuit-breaker status A P H A P H
Type of trip A P H A P H
Current alarms P H P H
Maintenance indicator P H
Installation diagnosis
Indication of faulty devices A P H
Fault log A P H
Associated Micrologic control unit
A = Micrologic A Installation and start-up
P = Micrologic P Mounting Mounted through door, without tools,
using 6 spring-clips supplied with the mod.
H = Micrologic H
Connection Prefabricated wiring systems

Connection of DMB300 display module
E59178
Wiring system
The wiring system is designed for low-voltage
24 V DC 1
power
power switchboards. Installation requires no tools
or special skills.
The prefabricated wiring ensures both data 2
ON ON
transmission (Modbus protocol) and 24V DC power
E59081
ON
n° 4n° 4 4 ON ON
n° 3n°° 3 n° n° 4
n° 2n° 2 n° 3 n° 3
n° 1n° 1 n° 2 n° 2
OUTOUT n° 1
distribution for the display module and the

IN IN T
OU
IN
1 2
communications modules on the Micrologic control

units.
3
CDM 303:
Reset
70
push
OFF
push
ON
NX 32
Ue (V)
220/440
525
H2
Icu (kA)
100
100
85
Connection cable between
display module and junction
Micrologic 690
Icw 85kA/1s
reset cat.B
Ap
Ig
Isd I ∆n d Icu
Ir 100%
Ii discharge Ics =
50/60Hz
O OFF IEC
947-2
UNE
AS NEMA
EN 60947-2
BS CEI
VDE
UTE
block
53
012
com
DMB300
Digipact
volets
shutters
Test
2 ?
P
U
3 I
select
4
E59180A
2
H1
1251
NW Uimp
12kV
Ui 1000V
8kV
Uimp Icu
Ue (kA)
(V) 100
220/240 85
70 480/690
Micrologic
reset
Ap
Ig
Isd I ∆n
Ir Ii
I ON
push
OOFF
push
discharged
O OFF
ON
Icu
100%
Ics =
947-2 NEMA
IEC UNE
BS CEI
UTE VDE
53
012
ON
n° 4
n° 3
n° 2
n° 1
OUT
IN
H1
1251
NW Uimp
12kV
Ui 1000V
8kV
Uimp Icu
Ue (kA)
(V) 100
220/240 85
70 480/690
Micrologic
reset
Ap
Ig
Isd I ∆n
Ir Ii
I ON
push
OOFF
push
discharged
O OFF
CJB 306 junction block

Icu
100%
Ics =
947-2 NEMA
IEC UNE
BS CEI
UTE VDE
53
012
E59179
3
Compact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control

units and the Modbus eco COM option
CCP 303:
Connection cable between
Connection of DMC300 display module Masterpact or Compact and
Maximum distance between module and circuit breaker: 1200 m
junction block
5
4
E59176A
4
E59082
2 2 2
H1 H1
1251 1251
NW Uimp
12kV NW Uimp
12kV
Ui 1000V Ui 1000V
8kV 8kV
Uimp Icu Uimp Icu
Ue (kA) Ue (kA)
(V) 100 (V) 100
220/240 85 220/240 85
70 480/690 70 480/690
Micrologic Micrologic
reset reset
Ap Ap
Ig Ig
Isd I ∆n Isd I ∆n
Ir Ii Ir Ii
I ON I ON
push push
OOFF OOFF
push push
discharged discharged
O OFF O OFF
Icu Icu
100% 100%
Ics = Ics =
947-2 NEMA 947-2 NEMA

IEC UNE IEC UNE
BS CEI BS CEI
UTE VDE UTE VDE
Reset push
ON NX 32
H2
Icu (kA)
012
53
012
53
CCR 301:
3 3
Ue (V) 100
OFF 100
push 220/440
70 25
525 85
Micrologic
690
reset Icw 85kA/1s
Ap
Ig
Isd I ∆n d cat.B
Icu
Ir Ii discharge 100%
Ics =
Roll of RS 485 cable

50/60Hz
O OFF 947-2 AS NEMA
IEC UNE
EN 60947-2
BS CEI
VDE
UTE
3
(2 RS 485 wires + 2 power
NW
Ui 1000V
Uimp
1251
8kV
Uimp
H1
Icu
12kV NW
Ui 1000V
Uimp
1251
8kV
H1
Uimp
Icu
12kV
supply wires)
Ue (kA) Ue (kA)
(V) 100 (V) 100
220/240 85 220/240 85
70 480/690 70 480/690
reset reset
Ap Ap
Ig Ig
Ir Ii Ir Ii
I ON I ON
push push
OOFF OOFF
push push
O OFF O OFF
E59177
Icu Icu
100% 100%
5
Ics = Ics =
947-2 NEMA 947-2 NEMA

IEC UNE IEC UNE
BS CEI BS CEI
UTE VDE UTE VDE
53 53
012 012
H2
ON NX 32
Reset push
Icu (kA)
Ue (V) 100
OFF 100
push 220/440
525 85
70 690
Micrologic Icw 85kA/1s
d cat.B
Icu
reset
Ap discharge 100%
Ig
Isd I ∆n Ics = H1 H1
Ir Ii 1251 1251
NW Uimp
12kV NW Uimp
12kV
50/60Hz
O OFF 947-2 AS NEMA
Ui 1000V
8kV
Ui 1000V
8kV
IEC UNE Uimp Icu Uimp Icu
EN 60947-2
BS CEI (kA) (kA)
UTE
VDE Ue Ue
(V) 100 (V) 100
220/240 85 220/240 85
70 480/690 70 480/690
reset reset
Ap Ap
Ig Ig
Ir Ii Ir Ii
I ON I ON
push push
OOFF OOFF
push push
O OFF O OFF
Icu Icu
100% 100%
Ics = Ics =
947-2 NEMA 947-2 NEMA

IEC UNE IEC UNE
BS CEI BS CEI
UTE VDE UTE VDE
53 53
012 012
CSD 309:
SubD 9-pin connector for
colour-coded connection of
wires to screw terminals
Compact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units and the Modbus eco COM option

Compact NS Installation recommendations
Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics 11
Operating conditions 144

Installation in switchboards 145
Power supply and weights 145
Safety clearances and minimum distances 146
Installation example 148
Door interlock for Compact NS630b to 1600 149
Connection of MN and MX voltage releases 150
Power connections for Compact NS80H-MA 151
NSC100N, NSA160
Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630 152
Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs 152
Connection of bare cables 153
Insulation of live parts 154
Power connections for Compact NS630b to 3200 155
Sizing of bars 157
Recommended drilling dimensions 159
Temperature derating 161
Power dissipation / Resistance 163

Connection 205

Installation Operating conditions
recommendations
E59432A
Altitude derating
Altitude does not significantly affect circuit-breaker characteristics up to 2000 m.
Above this altitude, it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the dielectric
strength and cooling capacity of air.
The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 2000
metres. The breaking capacities remain unchanged.
2000 m
Compact NS80 to 630

Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800
Average insulation level (V) 750 700 600 500
Maximum utilisation voltage (V) 690 550 480 420
Average thermal current (A) at 40 °C 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800
Average insulation level (V) 750 750 700 600
Maximum utilisation voltage (V) 690 590 520 460
Average thermal current (A) at 40 °C 1 x In 0.99 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
Vibrations
E59571A
Compact NS devices resist electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations.

Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 68-2-6 for the levels required
by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd’s, etc.):
b 2 ➞ 13.2 Hz: amplitude ±1 mm
b 13.2 ➞ 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to
mechanical parts.
Electromagnetic disturbances
Compact NS devices are protected against:
E59572A
b overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances

b overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system)
b devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
b electrostatic discharges produced by users.
Compact NS devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility
tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:
b IEC 60947-2, appendix F
b IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with Vigi earth-leakage function).
The above tests guarantee that:
b no nuisance tripping occurs
b tripping times are respected.

Installation in switchboards
Power supply and weights
Power supply
E23947
Compact NS circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or the bottom
without any reduction in performance. This capability facilitates connection when
installed in a switchboard.
push
to
trip
Weights
Circuit breaker Plug-in Chassis Vigi module Fully visible break block Motor-mechanism
base (Interpact INV) module
NS80H-MA 3P/3D 1.09
NSC100N 3P/3D 1 1.5
4P/4D 1.3 1.7
NS100N/H 1P/1D 0.5
2P/2D 1.45
NS100N 3P/2D 1.79 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS100N/H/L 3P/3D 2.05 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.57 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS125E 3P/3D 1.8 0.8 0.9
4P/4D 2.3 1.1 1.2
NS160N/H 1P/1D 0.5
2P/2D 1.45
NS160N 3P/2D 1.85 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS160N/H/L 3P/3D 2.10 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS250N 3P/2D 1.94 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS250N/H/L 3P/3D 2.2 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS400/630N/H/L 3P/3D 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8 4.6 2.8
4P/4D 8.13 2.8 2.2 3 4.9 2.8
NS630b to 1600 3P 14 14
manual operation 4P 18 18
NS630b to 1600 3P 14 16
electrical operation 4P 18 21
NS1600b to 3200 3P 24
4P 36
NSA 3P/3D 1.1 1.5

4P/4D 1.4 1.7
NB50N 3P/3D 0.7
NB100F/N 3P/3D 1.2
NB250N 3P/3D 1.94
NB400/600N 3P/3D 6.19
The table above presents the weights (in kg) of the circuit breakers and the main accessories, which must be summed to obtain the total weight of complete
configurations.

Installation Installation in switchboards
recommendations Safety clearances
and minimum distances
Compact NS80 to 630

When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be
maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection devices
installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity,
are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2.
If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:
b use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connections
b block off the busbars using insulating screens.
For Compact NS80 to 630 devices, terminal shields, interphase barriers and the
insulation kit are recommended and may be mandatory depending on the utilisation
voltage and the type of installation (fixed, withdrawable). (See page 147.)
Minimal distance between two adjacent circuit breakers
A1
A2
E23942
Minimal distance between Minimal distance between

the circuit breaker and top, the circuit breaker
bottom or side panels and front or rear panels
E50701
front F
panel if F < 8 mm : an
insulating screen
E50700
is mandatory
D1
D2 C1
C2
bare or painted sheetmetal; B F

insulation or insulated bars
Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars Bare sheetmetal

or painted sheet metal
Compact circuit breaker C1 D1 D2 C2 D1 D2 A1 (2) A2 (3) B
NS80H-MA U y 440 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0
NSC100N U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0
U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 35 35 0 40 0
NS100-250 U y 440 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0
U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0
U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 35 35 0 40 0
NS400-630 U y 440 V 0 30 30 5 60 60 0 10 0
U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 60 60 0 20 0
U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 100 100 0 40 0
(1) Distance must be doubled with interphase barriers.
(2) For Compact NS with long or short terminal shields.
(3) For Compact NS without terminal shields.
The mandatory distances when installing Compact NS circuit breakers are calculated from the device case, not taking into account the terminal shields or the

Fixed Compact NS400 1000 V AC, front connection
Power supply from the top or bottom. Connection by cables or busbars.
E94502
E50781
insulation
side panel
150
40 30
insulating kit
40 bare or painted
sheetmetal ; 30
150 insulation or
insulated bars
B=0
Insulating kit is standard.
Compact NS630b to 3200 (fixed devices)

A (*) A (*)
B B
E59717A
E59718A
146,5 (*) An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to

F remove the arc chutes.
Insulated parts Metal parts Live parts

NS630b to 1600
A 0 120 180
B 0 10 60
NS1600b to 3200
A 0 120 180
B 0 30 60
Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable devices)

B B
A
C C
E59719A
E59720A
40
180
F
Insulated parts Metal parts Live parts

A 0 0 30
B 10 10 60
C 0 0 90
F Datum

Installation Installation in switchboards
recommendations Installation example
painted sheetmetal
E50704
A A A A
Direct connection by Connection by cables Connection by insulated Rear connection or plug-in

bare cables, devices with lugs, devices with bars, devices with base, devices with terminal
with terminal shields. terminal shields. terminal shields. shields.
Minimum dimensions (mm) A

Compact circuit breaker
NS80H-MA/NSC100N 0
NS100-630 0
NS630b-1600 250
NS1600b-3200 300

Door interlock
Mounted on the left or right-hand side of the chassis,
E59429A
this locking device prevents opening of the door if the Y
circuit breaker is in the connected or test positions. If
the circuit breaker was connected with the door open,
the door may be closed without having to disconnect
the circuit breaker.
4
61
2 (1) (2)
11
Dimensions (mm)
Type (1) (2)
NS630b to 1600 (3P) 135 168
NS630b to 1600 (4P) 205 168
Device in the connected or test positions

Door locked
E59430A
door
F
5
23
Device in the disconnected position

Door not locked
E59431A
Note. The door interlock may be mounted on either the left

or right-hand side of the chassis.
F Datum

Installation Connection of MN and MX
recommendations voltage releases for
Release wiring
During pick-up, the power drawn is approximately 150 to 200 VA. For low supply
voltages (12, 24, 48 V), the maximum cable length therefore depends on the
supply voltage and the size of the cables.
Indicative values for maximum wire lengths (in metres)
12 V 24 V 48 V
2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
MN 100 % U source – – 58 35 280 165
85 % U source – – 16 10 75 45
MX 100 % U source 21 12 115 70 550 330
85 % U source 10 6 75 44 350 210
Note. The lengths mentioned are for each of the two supply wires.

Power connections for
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N,
NSA160
Standard With distribution

device connector
L (mm) 18 y 10
E54545
L S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 70 rigid 1.5 to 16 rigid
E59291A
1.5 to 50 flexible 1.5 to 10 flexible (1)

Tightening 5 2
OFF
torque (Nm)
S
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.
push
to
trip
E39432

Installation Power connections for
recommendations Compact NS100 to 630
Connection of insulated bars or
cables with lugs
NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630
Bars L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
E50702
I (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15
d (mm) y 10 y 10 y 15
E59292A
Ø e (mm) y6 y6 3 y e y 10
400
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
d
l
L L
e
push
Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
to
trip
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5

Tightening torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50
Tightening torque (Nm) (2) 5 5 20
(1) Tightening torque for lugs or bars on the circuit breaker.
(2) Tightening torque for rear connections or terminal extensions on plug-in base.
Connections with accessories - IEC228

NS100 to 250 NS100 to 250
Spreader Pole pitch
Separate parts One-piece spreader Without spreaders 35 mm
Tinned copper With spreaders 45 mm
Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensions
E55599
NS100 NS160/250
E18599
Bars L (mm) y 25 y 25
E50702
l (mm) 20 y I y 25 20 y I y 25
Where U > 600 V, the mandatory insulation kit Ø d (mm) y 10 y 10
400 e (mm) y6 y6
means separate spreaders cannot be used.
d Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5
The one-piece spreader must be used. l Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 25
Straight terminal Right-angle terminal L L Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5
extensions extensions e Tighten. (Nm) 10 (1), 5 (2) 15 (1), 5 (2)
Tinned copper. Tinned copper. torque
Upstream side. (1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker.
(2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base.
E18601
Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexible
E18600
NS400 and 630

NS400 and 600
Pole pitch
Separate spreaders with 52.5 and 70 mm pole Without spreaders 45 mm
pitches With spreaders 52.5 ou 70 mm
Tinned copper Where U > 600 V,
Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensions
use of the 52.5 mm
E50702
Bars L (mm) y 40 y 32
spreaders requires a
E18599
l (mm) d + 15 30 y I y 34
specific insulation kit.
d (mm) y 20 y 15
The 70 mm spreaders Ø
400 e (mm) 3 y e y 10 3 y e y 10
may not be used.
Ø (mm) 12,5 10,5
Edgewise terminal Right-angle terminal d
l Lugs L (mm) y 40 y 32
extension extensions Ø (mm) 12,5 10,5
L L
Tinned copper Tinned copper Tighten. (Nm) 50 (1), 20 (2) 50 (1), 20 (2)
Upstream side e torque
(1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker.
(2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base.
E18600
E21276
Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexible
E25961
Close-up view of two cables

with lugs.

Connection of bare cables
NS100 to 250
E54471
E59293A
E54472
E58540
E54468
1-cable connector Distribution connector Polybloc distribution block
1-cable connector Steel Aluminium

y 160A y 250A
L (mm) 20 20
E54545
L S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 95 (1) 10…16 25…35 50…185

150 max. flex.
Tightening torque (Nm) 12 15 20 26
6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)
S
L (mm) 15 or 30
S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 6 (1) 8 to 35
Tightening torque (Nm) 4 6
Polybloc distribution block (6 or 9 cables)
L (mm) 12
S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 10
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.
NS400 and 630

E54470
E54469
1-cable connector 2-cable connector
1-cable connector 2-cable connector

1 cable 2 cables
L (mm) 20 30 or 60
E54545
L S (mm2) Cu / Al 35 to 300 rigid 2 x 85 to 2 x 240 rigid

240 max. flexible 240 max. flexible
Tightening torque (Nm) 31 31
Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses

See page 155.
Ties for flexible bars and cables

See page 155.

recommendations Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Fixed Compact NS, front connections

NS100/250N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L
U < 500 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers
or long terminal or long terminal
shields recommended. shields recommended.
Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory.
500 V y U y 600 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers Interphase barriers
or long terminal or long terminal or long terminal
shields are shields are shields are
mandatory. mandatory. mandatory.
Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory.
U > 600 V Insulation kit Insulation kit Insulation kit
and insulated bars and insulated bars and insulated bars
The insulation kit is not compatible with:
b separate spreaders for Compact NS100 to 250. The one-piece spreader must be used
b separate spreaders (70 mm) for Compact NS400 and 630. For the 52.5 mm spreaders, there
is a specific insulation kit.
Fixed Compact NS, rear connections

NS100/250N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L
All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shields
recommended. recommended. recommended.
Withdrawable Compact NS, front and rear connections

NS100/250N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L
All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shields
Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory are mandatory.
for U u 500 V.
Use of an insulating screen (supplied with the plug-in base) is mandatory.

E59565A
aa
E59568A
aa
Schneider Electric
B
E59566A
E59569A
Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses

Compact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinned-
copper and tinned-aluminium conductors (flexible or rigid bars, cables.
In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted
on the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and maintained in place
using supports.
Electrical connection points on all types of devices (switch-disconnectors,
contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support.
Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must
be made of non-magnetic material.
Ties for flexible bars and cables

The table below indicates the maximum distance between ties depending on the
prospective short-circuit current.
The maximum distance between ties attached to the switchboard frame is 400 mm.
Type of
tie
Maximum distance
between ties (mm)
Short-circuit
current (kA rms)
"Panduit" ties
Width: 4.5 mm
Maximum load: 22 kg
Colour: white
200
10
100
15
50
20
Note. For cables u 50 mm2, use 9 mm-wide ties.
Connection of bars
B
E
E59567A
Maximum distance A between the circuit-breaker connection

"Sarel" ties
Width: 9 mm
Maximum load: 90 kg
Colour: black
350
20
200
27
and the first spacer between bars, depending on the short-circuit current
Isc (kA)
Distance (mm)
A
30
350
C
50
300
65
250
80
150
E59570A
100
150
100
35
70
45
Bars must be adjusted to ensure correct positioning on the terminals before bolting (B).
Bars must rest on a support firmly attached to the switchboard frame, such that the
circuit-breaker terminals do not bear any weight (C).
Electrodynamic forces
The first spacer between bars must be positioned within a maximum distance (see
table below) of the connection point to the circuit breaker. This distance is
calculated to resist the electrodynamic stresses exerted between the bars of each
phase during a short-circuit.
50 (double
ties)
100
150
150
155
E
recommendations Compact NS630b to 3200
1 2 3 4 5 Connections
E47678A
The quality of bar connections depends, among other things, on the tightening
torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same
consequences as under-tightening.
The correct tightening torques for the connection of bars to the circuit-breaker
terminals are indicated in the table below.
The values below are for copper bars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) and steel nuts and
bolts (class 8.8).
The same values apply to AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars
(French standard NFA 02-104 and American National Standard H-35-1).
Examples of bar connections
E47668
E47667B
E47665
6
1 terminal screws, factory tightened to 13 Nm
2 circuit-breaker terminal
3 bars Tightening torque for bars
4 bolt Rated diameter (mm) Drilling (mm) Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (Nm)
5 washer diameter with flat or grower with contact or split
6 nut washers washers
10 11 37.5 50
Bar drilling
Examples
E47329A
E47330A
E47331A
Insulation distance
E47680A
X
Dimensions (mm)
Utilisation voltage X minimum
Ui y 600 V 8 mm
Ui y 1000 V 14 mm
Bar bending
Bars must be bent according to the table below. A tighter bend may cause cracks.
E47679A
r
e
Dimensions (mm)
e Radius r
Minimum Recommended
5 5 7.5
10 15 18 to 20

Sizing of bars
The following tables are based on the following assumptions:

b maximum permissible temperature of bars is 100 °C
b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
b busbars made of copper and not painted.
Note.
The values presented in the tables are the result of trials and theoretical calculations on the
basis of the assumptions mentioned above.
These tables are intended as an aid in designing connections, however, the actual values must
be confirmed by tests on the installation.
Front or horizontal rear connections
E59294A
Compact Maximum Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °C
service Number of bars Number of bars Number of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick
NS630b 400 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10
NS800 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10
NS1000 1000 3b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NS1250 1250 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
2b.80 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5
NS1600 / 1600b 1400 2b.80 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10
NS1600 / 1600b 1600 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 3b.50 x 10
NS2000 1800 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10
NS2000 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.63 x 10
NS2500 2200 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 5 2b.100 x 10
NS2500 2500 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
NS3200 2800 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10
NS3200 3000 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 10
NS3200 3200 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10
Note.
With Compact NS630b to NS1600, it is recommended to use 50 mm wideness bars (see "Recommanded busbars drilling").

Sizing of bars
Vertical rear connections
E59422A
Compact Maximum Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °C
service Number of bars Number of bars Number of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick
NS800 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10
NS1000 1000 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10
NS1250 1250 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10
NS1600 1400 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NS1600 1600 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10

Recommended drilling dimensions
Rear connection Rear connection with spreaders

E59308A
E59308A
E59309A
E59310A
50 50 63 80
15 15
12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 25,5 12,5
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi
25 12,5 25 12,5 25 12,5 25 25 12,5
Middle left or middle Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader Left or right spreader
right spreader for 4P for 4P for 3P
E59325A
E59326A
E59327A
E59328A
77 77 77 77
38,5 38,5 38,5
E59324B
44 38,5
13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5
25 9,5 12,5 25 = = 25 = = 25 = = 25 = =
30 30 30 30
60
82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 82 52 15
12,5 15
5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11
2 Ø11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52
Vertical rear connection
E59315 A
E59311A
E59312A
E59313A
E59314A
32 40 50 63 80
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi
25 25 25 25 25
12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5
60
E59329B
12,5
12,5 9,5
25 44
2 Ø11
Front connection Front connection with vertical-connection adapter

E59308A
E59308A
E59309A
E59310A
50 50 63 80
15 15
12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 25,5 12,5
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi
25 12,5 25 12,5 25 12,5 25 25 12,5

E59332A
Top terminal Bottom terminal 89 12,5

25 = = 15
44
E94518
9,5 2 M10 screws

25 15
15 21
101 21
3 Ø11
25 15
15 9,5 15
2 M10 screws 20
44

Recommended drilling dimensions
Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)

E59308A
E59309A
80
E59310A
50 63
15 15
12,5 12,5 25,5 12,5
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi
25 12,5 25 12,5 25 25 12,5

E59462B
76 25
13 = =
=
=
3 Ø11
15
Front connection with vertical-connection adapter (NS1600b to 2500)

E59731A
E59732A
E59733A
63 80 100
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi E59734A

Ø12 maxi
25 25 25 25
25 25 25 100 25
25 25 25 25
12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5
4 Ø11
E59735A
25
25 60 100
25
20
20 12,5 20
45 15 25 25
60 80
Front connection (NS3200)

E59733A
100 Ø12 maxi

E59734A
Ø12 maxi
25
25 100 25
25 25
25
12,5 12,5
12,5 12,5
4 Ø11
E59735A
25
25 60 100
25
20
20 12,5 20
45 15 25 25
60 80

Temperature derating
Compact NS devices equipped
with thermal-magnetic trip units
The values opposite are valid for fixed circuit When the ambient temperature is greater than 40 °C, overload-protection
breakers equipped with one of the following modules: characteristics are slightly modified.
b Vigi module To determine tripping times using time/current curves, use Ir values corresponding
b ammeter module to the thermal setting on the device, corrected as indicated in the tables below.
b insulation-monitoring module
b current-transformer module. Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS
They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit Rating (A) 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
breakers equipped with one of the following modules: 16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
b ammeter module 25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
b current-transformer module. 40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers 63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation- 80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
monitoring module, the coefficients in the table below 100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
must be applied. 125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
Trip unit Coefficient 160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
TM16 to TM125 1 200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
TM160 to TM250 0.9 250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units
Rating (A) 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
32 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
50 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
Compact NSA160
Rating (A) 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
32 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
50 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
Compact NB50…NB600
NB50 / NB100 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C
NB50N 1 1 1 1 1
NB100F/N 1 1 1 1 1
NB250N
Rating (A) 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
125 125 122 119 116 113
150 150 146 143 139 135
175 175 171 166 162 158
200 200 195 190 185 180
225 225 220 214 208 203
NB400N
Rating (A) 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
400 400 390 380 370 360
NB600N
Rating (A) 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
600 600 585 570 550 535

Installation Temperature derating
recommendations Compact NS devices equipped with
The values opposite are valid for fixed circuit Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in temperature. However, the
breakers equipped with one of the following modules: maximum permissible current in the circuit breaker still depends on the ambient
b Vigi module temperature.
b ammeter module
b insulation-monitoring module
b current-transformer module. Compact NS100...NS250
They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending
breakers equipped with one of the following modules: on the ambient temperature.
b ammeter module NS100-160N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
b current-transformer module. In: 40 to 160 A no derating
However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers Ir max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation- NS250N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
monitoring module, the coefficients in the table below In: 100 to 160A no derating
must be applied. Ir max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff. In: 250A 250 250 250 237.5 237.5 225 225
NS100N/H/L STR22SE/GE 40 to 100 1 Ir max 1 1 1 0.95 0.95 0.90 0.90
NS160N/H/L STR22SE/GE 40 to 160 1
NS250N/H/L STR22SE/GE 100 and 160 1 Compact NS400 and NS630
NS250N/H/L STR22SE/GE 250 0.86 The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending
on the ambient temperature.
The values opposite are valid for fixed or plug-in / NS400N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of Fixed In: 400A 400 400 400 390 380 370 360
the following modules: Io/Ir max 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9
b ammeter module Plug-in / In: 400 400 390 380 370 360 350 340
b current-transformer module. withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85
However, for fixed or plug-in / withdrawable circuit
NS630N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation-
Fixed In: 630A 630 615 600 585 570 550 535
monitoring module, the coefficients in the table below
Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85
must be applied.
Plug-in / In: 570A 570 550 535 520 505 490 475
Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff. withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85 1/0.83 1/0.8 0.8/0.98 0.8/0.95
NS400N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.97
STR23SV and 53SV
NS630N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.9
STR23SV and 53SV
Note. To provide the Visu function, Compact NS circuit
breakers, with or without a Vigi module, are combined with
INV switch-disconnectors. Tripping values for the selected
combination are indicated in the Interpact catalogue.
Compact NS630b to NS1600 (1)

The table below indicates the maximum rated-current value for each type of connection, depending on the ambient temperature.
For mixed connections, use the same derating values as for horizontal connections.
Version Fixed device
Connection Front or horizontal rear Vertical rear
temp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS630b N/H/L 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 N/H/L 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 N/H/L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NS1250 N/H 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1240 1090 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180
NS1600 N/H 1600 1600 1560 1510 1470 1420 1360 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1510 1460
Version Withdrawable device

temp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS630b N/H/L 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 N/H/L 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 N/H/L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 920 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 990
NS1250 N/H 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1170 1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1090
NS1600 N/H 1600 1600 1520 1480 1430 1330 1160 1600 1600 1600 1560 1510 1420 1250

temp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS1600b N/H 1600 1600 1600 1600 1500 1450 1400 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1550 1500
NS2000 N/H 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800 1700 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800
NS2500 N/H 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
NS3200 N/H - - - - - - - 3200 3200 3200 3180 3080 2970 2860
(1) For a circuit breaker mounted in horizontal position, the derating to be applied is equivalent to that of a front or horizontal rear connected circuit breaker.
(2) Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections.

Power dissipation / Resistance
Compact NS devices equipped
with thermal-magnetic trip units
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W). Compact NSC100N

Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mΩ). Fixed device Additional modules
Total power dissipation is the value measured at In, 3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi (N, L3) Vigi (L1, L2)
50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker NSC100N 16 15 4 0.06 0.06
(values above power P = 3RI2). 20 11.2 4.5 0.1 0.1
25 8 5 0.16 0.16
32 5.4 5.5 0.26 0.26
40 3.7 6 0.4 0.4
50 2.8 7 0.63 0.63
63 2 8 1 1
70 2 10 1.3 1.3
80 1.4 9 1.6 1.6
100 1 10 2.5 2.5
NSC100NA 100 0.6 6 2.5 2.5
Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units
Fixed device Additional modules
3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- Ammeter Transfo.
(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawable module module
NS100N/H/L 16 11.42 2.92 0 0 0 0 0
25 6.42 4.01 0 0 0.1 0 0
32 3.94 4.03 0.06 0.03 0.15 0.1 0.1
40 3.42 5.47 0.10 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
50 1.64 4.11 0.15 0.08 0.3 0.1 0.1
63 2.17 8.61 0.3 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.1
80 1.37 8.77 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.88 8.8 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NS160N/H/L 80 1.26 8.06 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.77 7.7 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
125 0.69 10.78 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3
160 0.55 13.95 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NS250N/H/L 125 0.61 9.45 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3
160 0.46 11.78 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
200 0.39 15.4 2.8 1.4 4 0.8 0.8
250 0.3 18.75 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
Compact NS80 and NS100 to 630 equipped with MA trip units

3 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- Ammeter Transfo.
(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawable module module
NS80H 1.5 93.3 0.21
2.5 89.6 0.56
6.3 75.6 3
12.5 12.8 2
25 2.24 1.4
50 1.04 2.6
80 0.94 6.02
NS100N/H/L 2.5 148.42 0.93 0 0 0 0 0
6.3 99.02 3.93 0 0 0 0 0
12.5 4.05 0.63 0 0 0 0 0
25 1.66 1.04 0 0 0.1 0 0
50 0.67 1.66 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.1
100 0.52 5.2 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NS160N/H/L 150 0.38 8.55 1.35 0.68 2.6 0.45 0.45
NS250N/H/L 220 0.3 14.52 2.9 1.45 4.89 0.97 0.97
NS400H/L 320 0.12 12.29 3.2 1.6 6.14 1.54 1.54
NS630H/L 500 0.1 25 13.99 7 15 3.75 3.75
Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS100 to 160

Fixed device
1/2 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole
NS100N/H 16 11.3 2.89
20 6.3 2.52
30 2.9 2.61
40 2.9 4.64
50 1.4 3.5
63 1.4 5.56
80 1.25 8
100 0.76 7.6
NS160N/H 125 0.63 9.84
160 0.48 12.29

Installation Power dissipation / Resistance
recommendations Compact NS devices equipped
with electronic trip units
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W). Compact NS100 to NS630
Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mΩ) Fixed device Additional modules
(measured cold). Total power dissipation is the value 3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- Ammeter Transfo.
measured at In, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four- (N, L3) (L1, L2) drawable module module
pole circuit breaker (values above power P = 3RI2). NS100N/H/L 40 0.84 1.34 0.1 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
100 0.468 4.68 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NS160N/H/L 40 0.73 1.17 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.36 3.58 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
160 0.36 9.16 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NS250N/H/L 100 0.27 2.73 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.2 0.2
250 0.28 17.56 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
NS400N/H/L 400 0.12 19.2 3.2 1.6 9.6 2.4 2.4
NS630N/H/L 630 (1) 0.1 39.69 6.5 3.25 19.49 5.95 5.95
(1) The dissipation values for the Vigi modules and withdrawable circuit breakers are given
for 570 A
Compact NSA160
3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi
(N, L3) (L1, L2)
NSA160 16 15 4 0.06 0.06
25 8 5 0.16 0.16
32 5.4 5.5 0.26 0.26
40 3.7 6 0.4 0.4
50 2.8 7 0.63 0.63
63 2 8 1 1
80 1.4 9 1.6 1.6
100 1 10 2.5 2.5
125 0.8 12.5 3.9 3.9
160 0.6 15.4 6.4 6.4
NSA125NA 125 0.7 11
NSA160NA 160 0.6 15.4

Dissipated power Input/output resistance
N/H L N/H L
NS630b N/H/L 30 45 0.026 0.039
NS800 N/H/L 45 60 0.026 0.039
NS1000 N/H/L 65 100 0.026 0.039
NS1250 N/H 130 0.026
NS1600 N/H 220 0.026
Version Withdrawable device

N/H L N/H L
NS630 N/H/L 55 115 0.038 0.072
NS800 N/H/L 90 120 0.038 0.072
NS1000 N/H/L 150 230 0.038 0.072
NS1250 N/H 250 0.036
NS1600 N/H 460 0.036
Compact NS1600b à 3200

NS1600b N/H 250 0.019
NS2000 N/H 250 0.013
NS2500 N/H 300 0.008
NS3200 N/H 680 0.008

Compact NS Dimensions, volumes
Presentation 2
Compact NB 166
Compact NS80H-MA 168
Compact NSC100 170
Compact NSA160 171
Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 172
Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 174
Vigicompact NS100 to 630 178
(single-pole and two-pole versions)
Visu function for Compact NS100 to 630 182
(combination with Interpact INV)
Motor-mechanism module for Compact NS100 to 630 184
Rotary handle for Compact NS100 to 630 186
Indication and measurement modules 188
Front accessories for Compact NS100 to 630 190
Dimensions 192
Mounting 193
Front-panel cutouts 194
Rotary handle 195
Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) 196
Dimensions, mounting and cutouts 196
Rotary handle 197
Dimensions 198
Compact NS630b to 3200 200
External modules 200
Accessories NS630b to 3200 204
Connection 205

Dimensions, volumes Compact NS80H-MA
Dimensions Mounting
On backplate On rails
E21875
E21874
30 30
E94522
E21873 15 15
u 32
103
120
100 100
X X X X
60 206 48,5 48,5
(a) ∅4
Y Y
∅4
Y
64,5 45
70 90
80
84
100
Z
(a) long terminal shields
Front-panel cutouts
Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
E21881
E21884
E21882
E21883
60,5 68,5 68,5

X X X X
26 30 30
B/C
Y Y Y
71 14,5 46
81 29 92
Z

Standard direct rotary handle
Front-panel cutout
E21885
E21888
E21886
7,5
E21887
ON
I
65,5 60° 4,2
X 68,5
tripped X X
28,5 60° X 30
O
OFF
Y
47,5 Y
82,5 45 85 43
112 80 Z 86
Z 90

Front-panel cutout
75
E21889
37,5
E21890
45°
7,5
7,5
E21891
60° ∅50
4,2 75 4,2
X
X 37,5 X
60° ∅4,2
Y 72 36 Y
mini 175
L ( maxi 590 )
Z
shaft length = L _ 109
MCC direct rotary handle

Front-panel cutout
120
69,2
7,5
E21893
E21892
E21894
4,2 120 100

X
X
60 45,8
1 to 3 maxi Y
Y 51,7
116 ± 2
100
E22046
Note. h
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
enclosure where ∆ u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge. ∆

Dimensions, volumes Compact NSC100
Dimensions
Compact NSC100
3 poles 4 poles
E43398
E43400
E43399
103
120
X X X
60 206
90
(a) (a)
Y Y
15 70
80 45 45
84 90 120
100
Z (a) long terminal shields
Vigicompact NSC
3 poles 4 poles
101,2
E43401
E43403
E43402
103
120
X X
X
60 206
90
(a) (a)
Y Y
15 70
80 45 75
84 210 240
100
Z (a) long terminal shields.

Front-panel cutout
75
E21889
37,5
E21890
45°
7,5
7,5
E21891
60° ∅50
4,2 75 4,2
X
X 37,5 X
60° ∅4,2
Y 72 36 Y
mini 175
L ( maxi 590 )
Z
shaft length = L _ 109
Note.
Centre line X indicates the centre of the mounting r ail.

Compact NSA160
Dimensions
Compact NSA160
3 poles 4 poles
E21897
E21895
E21896
98,5
120
X X X
45
64,5 206
90
(a) (a)
Y Y
15 72,5
82,5 45 45
89,5 90 120
102,5
Z
Vigicompact NSA160
3 poles 4 poles
101,2
E21903
E21902
E21901
98,5
120
X X
45
X
64,5 206
90
(a) (a)
Y Y
15 72,5
82,5 45 75
89,5 210 240
102,5
Z

Dimensions Front-panel cutout
E31295
75
37,5
E31296
5 45° 5
E31294
83
Ø50
60°
3 3
X 75
X 37,5 X
60° Ø4,2
Y 72 36 Y
mini 122
Z
maxi 147
Note.
Centre line X indicates the centre of the mounting r ail.

Dimensions, volumes Compact NS100 to 630
(fixed version)
Dimensions
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
E21503
E21504
E21502
H1 H3 H5 H7
X X
X
H H2 H4 H6
(a)
Y (b)
(c) (a) short terminal shields.
(b) long terminal shields Y
L (available for spreaders on
L
P1 L1 NS400 to 630, pitch 52.5 :
L2
P2 L1 = 157.5 mm,
P4 L2 = 210 mm).
Z (c) interphase barriers.
Mounting
On backplate
E21507
K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
E21508
K1 K2
K K
G1 G5
X X
G G4
∅T
∅T4 (d)
Y Y
(d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers,
the centre hole is not necessary.
On rails
K1 K2
E21511
E21512
U (e) K K
G1
X X
G ∅T
Y Y
On DIN rail with adapter plate

E49738
G50
G51
G49
G48
G47

Front-panel cutouts
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker
Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
E21600
E21601
E21603
E21604
A
C1 C3 C3
X X X X
C
C2 C2
B/C Y Y Y
R R2
R4(3P)
P5 R1 R5(4P)
P6
Z
With escutcheon With toggle cover

E21609
E21602
E21608
C7
X X X C21
C6 C20
Y Y
R6 R12
P6 R7 R13
Z
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 C20 C21 G G1 G4
NS100/160/250N/H/L 29 76 54 108 43 104 34 86 62.5 125 70
NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 92.5 184 56.5 146 46.5 126 100 200 113.5
Type G5 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 H H1 H2 H3 H4

NS100/160/250N/H/L 140 95 75 13.5 23 17.5 80.5 161 94 188 160.5
NS400/630N/H/L 227 127.5 255 142.5 285 240
Type H5 H6 H7 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2
NS100/160/250N/H/L 321 178.5 357 17.5 35 70 52.5 105 140 81 86
NS400/630N/H/L 480 237 474 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110
Type P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R12
NS100/160/250N/H/L 111 (1) 83 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 43
NS400/630N/H/L 168 107 112 31.5 63 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 63
(1) : P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type R13 ØT ØT4 U(e)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 86 6 22 y 32
NS400/630N/H/L 126 6 32 y 32
(e) U y 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).
E22046
Note. h
hinge. ∆

Dimensions, volumes Vigicompact NS100 to 630
(fixed version)
Dimensions
E21515
E21514
E21513
X X X
H9 H11 H13 H15
H8 H10 H12 H14
(a)
(b)
(c)
Y Y
P1 L L
P2 L1
(a) short terminal shields. L2
P4 (b) long terminal shields.
Z (c) interphase barriers.
Mounting
On backplate
K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
E21518
E21519
K1 K2
K K
G7 G1 G9
X X
G6 G8
∅T
∅T4 (d)
Y Y
On rails
K1 K2
E21520
E21521
U (e) K K
G7 G1
X X
G6
∅T
Y Y

Front-panel cutouts
Cutout A Cutout B
E21796
E21795
E21605
R1
A R
C1
X X X
C
C3
C4
C2
C5
R28
B
Y Y
P5 R28 R26
P6 R26 R2
Z R4 (3P)
R5 (4P)
With escutcheons
R7
E21800
R6
E21610
C7
X X
C6
C18
C19
Y
P6 R27
Z R11
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C18 C19 C20 C21 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9
NS100/160/250N/H/L 29 76 130 184 86 37 43 104 71 68 34 86 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215
NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 192 276 147.5 37 56.5 146 132 68 46.5 126 100 200 200 300 213.5 327
Type H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2 P4 P5

NS100/160/250N/H/L 155.5 236 169 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 52.5 105 140 81 86 111 (1) 83
NS400/630N/H/L 227.5 355 242.5 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110 168 107
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R11 R12 R13 R26 R27 ØT ØT4 U(e)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 58 43 86 14.5 29 6 22 y 32
NS400/630N/H/L 112 31.5 29 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 58 63 126 32 47 6 32 y 32
(e) U y 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).
E22046
Note.
h
hinge. ∆

Dimensions
Plug-in base 2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
N M
Z
(*)
K1 K1 K1
E21524
E21522
E21523
H17 G11
X X X
H16 G10
(*)
Y Y
L L
P7 L1 L2
P8
P9 P4
Chassis 2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
N M
E21586
E21584
E21585
H19
X X X
H18
(*) (*)
Z Y Y
P7 L6 L6
P8 L7 L9
P9 P2 P12 L8 L10
P4
Mounting
Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis)
2P, 3P K1 4P K2 2P, 3P K1 4P K2
K K K K
E21588
E21587
E21526
E21525
G11 G13 G11 G13

X X X X
G10 G12 G10 G12
Y Y Y Y
∅T K5 K5 ∅T K11 K11
K6 K7 K12 K13
On rails (plug-in base or chassis)

2P, 3P 4P
K21 K22
U K20 K20
E21533
E21534
X X
G21
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory.
Note.
G20 Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
Y Y enclosure where ∆ u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
∅T hinge.

On backplate N (plug-in base or chassis)
Front connection (insulating screen is mandatory between the backplate and the base, supplied with the base)
2P, 3P 4P
E21589
E21590
K1 K2
K K
G15
X X
G14
Y Y
∅T
Interior rear connection Exterior rear connection

2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P
K1 K2 K1 K2
K K K K K K K K
E21591
E21592
E21593
E21594
∅T6
G16 G18 G15

G15
X X X X
∅T
G14 G17 G14 G19
Y Y Y Y
∅T K1 K1 K1 K1 K1 ∅T5 K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
Front-panel cutouts
Plug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons
E21619
E21620
C11
X X
C17
P44
Z
Y
R8
R9
Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 42.5 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 66 132 82 164 37.5 75 111 222 190
NS400/630N/H/L 155 56 150 300 137 274 125 250 101 202 126 252 75 150 170.5 341 283.5
Type G25 G26 G27 H16 H17 H18 H19 K K1 K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13 K20
NS100/160/250N/H/L 380 208 416 102.5 205 103.5 210 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 74 148 183 35
NS400/630N/H/L 567 318.5 637 157.5 315 140 280 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 228 50
Type K21 K22 L L1 L2 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 P2 P4 P7 P8 P9 P10 P12
NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 105 52.5 105 140 92.5 185 216 220 251 86 111 (1) 27 45 75 64 32
NS400/630N/H/L 100 145 70 140 185 110 220 250 265 295 110 168 27 45 100 86 32
Type P44 R8 R9 U (2) ØT ØT5 ØT6
NS100/160/250N/H/L 123 74 148 y 32 6 24 30
NS400/630N/H/L 147 90 180 y 32 6 33 33
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L
(2) U y 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).

Dimensions, volumes Vigicompact NS100 to 630
Dimensions
Plug-in base
E21537
N M K1 K1 K1
(*)
E21536
E21535
H17 G11
X X X
H16 G10
(*)
Y Y
P7 L L
P8 L1 L2
P9 P4
Z
Chassis
See withdrawable Compact, page 176.
Mounting
Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis)
2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P
E21587
K1
E21526
E21588
K2 K1 K2
E21525
K K K K
G11 G13 G11 G13

X X X X
G10 G12 G10 G12
Y Y Y Y
∅T K5 K5 ∅T K11 K11
K6 K7 K12 K13
On rails (plug-in base or chassis)

2P, 3P 4P
K21 K22
E21533
E21534
U K20 K20
X X
G21
G20
Y Y
∅T
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory

Front-panel cutouts
Plug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons
See fixed Compact, page 175.
R9
E21813
R8
E21623
C11
X X
C16
C17
C13
Y
P44 R33
Z R34
Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C13 C16 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G20 G21 H16
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 84 55 42.5 95 190 87 174 37.5 75 102.5
NS400/630N/H/L 155 84 116.5 56 150 300 137 274 75 150 157.5
Type H17 K K1 K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13 K20

NS100/160/250N/H/L 205 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 74 148 183 35
NS400/630N/H/L 315 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 228 50
Type K21 K22 L L1 L2 P4 P7 P8 P9 P44 R8

NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 105 52.5 105 140 111 (1) 27 45 75 123 74
NS400/630N/H/L 100 145 70 140 185 168 27 45 100 147 90
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type R9 R33 R34 ØT U (2)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 148 74 148 6 y 32
NS400/630N/H/L 180 91.5 148 6 y 32
E22046
Note.
h
hinge. ∆

(single-pole and two-pole versions)
Dimensions
1 pole 2 poles
E29213
E29214
E29215
H1 H3 H7
X X X
H H2 H6
(a)
(b)
Y
L3 Y
L3
P1 L5
L4
P2
P4 (a) short terminal shields
Z (b) interphase barriers
Mounting
On backplate
1 pole 2 poles
E29216
E21506
K1 K1
K K
G1 G5
X X
G G4
ØT
ØT4 (c)
Y Y
(c) for rear connection only
On rails
1 pole 2 poles
E29217
K1
U (d)
E21510
K K
G1
X X
G ØT
Y Y
(d) U y 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used

Front-panel cutout
E21600
E21601
E29218
E21604
A
C1 C3 C3
X X X X
C
C2 C2
B/C Y Y Y
R R2
R1 R4(1P)
P5 R5(2P)
P6
Z
With escutcheon
E21609
E21608
C7
X X
C6
Y
R6
P6 R7
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 G G1 G4 G5 H
NS100/160/250 29 76 54 108 43 104 62.5 125 70 140 80.5
Type H1 H2 H3 H4 H6 H7 K K1 L3 L4 L5
NS100/160/250 161 94 188 160.5 178.5 357 17.5 35 17.5 70 35
Type P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6
NS100/160/250 81 86 111 83 88 14.5 29 19 38 73 29
Type R7 ØT ØT4 U(d)

NS100/160/250 58 6 22 y 32
(d) U y 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used
E22046
Note. h
hinge. ∆

Dimensions, volumes Visu function
(combination with Interpact INV)
Fixed Compact NS100 to 250 with Visu function Interpact INV100 to 250
3 poles 4 poles
138 (a)
131 314 for front
96 connection. 140
E62428
E62429
140
86 316.5 for rear 52,5 52,5
connection. 35 35 35 35 35 35
322.5 with
E62427
connectors.
(b)
80.5 for front
connection.
83 for rear
510 connection.
474 89 with connectors.
215 215
(a)
277,5 277,5
X X X
93,7 (b)
178,5 160,5
Y Y
52,5 52,5
105 140
Z
Mounting on rails
3 poles 4 poles
E62431
70 70
E62430
35 35
7 ∅6 17,5 9 ∅6 17,5
X X
100 100
50 50
22,3 22,3
157,5 157,5
125 X 125 X
62,5 62,5
Y Y
Front-panel cutout
E62432A
E62433A
86 132
65,5
84
17,5
115,5
X X 76
29
Y 14,5
29
z

Fixed Compact NS400 to 630 with Visu function
3 poles 4 poles
162 (a)
492.5 for front
E62435
160,4 185
E62436
185
120 connection 70 70
110 493.5 for rear 45 45 45 45 45 45
connection
E62434
512.5 with right-angle

terminal extensions
536.5 with edgewise
terminal extensions
532.5 with spreaders
525 with 2-cable
connectors.
(b)
241 241
127.5 for front
522,5
connection
128.5 for rear 341 341
717,5
connection
(a) 147.5 with right-angle
terminal extensions
X X
X 171.5 with edgewise
terminal extensions
(b) 167.5 with spreaders
142,5
240
160 with 2-cable
connectors.
Y Y
70 70
Z
140 185
Mounting on rails
3 poles 4 poles
90 E62438
E62437
90
45 45
7 ∅6 22,5 7 ∅6 22,5
75 75
X X
150 150
241 241
33 33
200 X X
200
100 100
Y
Y
Front-panel cutout
E62440
E62439
172
110 86
127
22,5
177,5
X X 116
41,5
Y
31,5
Z
63

Dimensions, volumes Motor-mechanism module for
Dimensions
3 poles 4 poles
E21599
E21598
E21597
H20
H22
H21 X
X X
H23
Y Y
L L
L12 L2
L11
P33 L1
P32
Z
Front-panel cutouts
With IP40, IK07 escutcheons and protection collar
for Vigi module
R9
E21813
R8
E21614
E21621
E21612
C11
X X C23 X X
C16
C22 C17
Y C13
R14
R15
Y
P45 P45 R33
Z Z R34
E22046
Note. h
hinge. ∆

Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 H20 H21 H22 H23 L L1
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 84 56 42.5 29 76 62.5 97 45.5 73 52.5 105
NS400/630N/H/L 155 84 116.5 56 41.5 126 100 152 83 123 70 140
Type L2 L11 L12 P32 P33 P45 R8 R9 R14 R15 R33 R34
NS100/160/250N/H/L 140 91 45.5 178 143 145 74 148 48.5 97 74 148
NS400/630N/H/L 185 123 61.5 250 215 217 90 180 64.5 129 91.5 148

Dimensions, volumes Rotary handle
direct rotary handle

3 poles 4 poles
E21627
E21625
L12
E21626
I
H23 60° I
H24 60°
X DD DD
X
H20 60° O
X 60° O
(a) sans se
(b) avec se
Y Y
(c) avec se
L15 L
P34 L L2
P35 (a) L11
P36 (b) L1
Z P37 (c)
(a) without keylock

(b) with Ronis keylock
(c) with Profalux keylock
Front-panel cutouts
Compact Vigicompact
E21614
E21805
E21613
E21615
X X C23 X X C23
C22
C4
C22
Y C5
R14
P43
Z R15
Y
Z P43 R28
R26
R14
R15
Withdrawable circuit breaker

Compact Vigicompact
R9
E21813
R8
E21618
E21622
E21620
C11 C11
X X X X
C16
C17 C17
C13
P44
Z
Y Y
R8 P44 R33
R9 Z R34
An escutcheon is mandatory Protection collar for Vigi module is mandatory.

Escutcheons are mandatory for rotary handles and Vigi protection collars.

MCC direct rotary handle
Front-panel cutout
L8
E21632
L7
L12
E21633
E21634
H24 H10 G39
X
X X H9 G38
1 to 3 maxi Y
K14
P42±2 Y
K15
Z
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker Withdrawable circuit breaker
Cut shaft at length: Cut shaft at length:
P38-126 mm (NS100 to 250) P40-122 mm (NS100 to 250)
P38-150 mm (NS400 to 630) P40-150 mm (NS400 to 630)
L14
E21628
L13
E21629
L12
E21630
10 60°
I
H24 H26
X X
O
X H25
60°
Y
P38
Z
Front-panel cutout
E21631
45°
L12
∅T7
H24
∅T6
G36
G37 Y
Dimensions (mm)
Type C4 C5 C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 G36 G37 G38 G39 H9 H10 H20 H23 H24
NS100/160/250N/H/L 86 37 103 84 55 42,5 29 76 36 72 41 100 60 120 28 73 9
NS400/630N/H/L 147.5 37 155 84 116.5 56 41.5 126 36 72 51 145 83 160 40 123 24.5
Type H25 H26 K14 K15 L L1 L2 L7 L8 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 P34 P35 P36
NS100/160/250N/H/L 37.5 75 50 100 52.5 105 140 69 120 91 9.25 37.5 75 55 121 155 156
NS400/630N/H/L 37.5 75 72.5 145 70 140 185 85 160 123 5 37.5 75 66.5 145 179 180
Type P37 P38(1) P40(1) P42 P43 P44 R1 R8 R9 R14 R15 R26 R33 R34 ØT6 ØT7
NS100/160/250N/H/L 164 u 185 u 248 125 89 123 29 74 148 48.5 97 14.5 74 148 4.2 50
NS400/630N/H/L 188 u 209 u 272 149 112 147 29 90 180 64.5 129 32 91.5 148 4.2 50
(1) y 600 mm.
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where ∆ u 100 + (h x 5)
with respect to the door hinge.

Dimensions, volumes Indication
and measurement modules
Dimensions
Circuit breaker with ammeter module Circuit breaker with current-transformer module
E21517
E21516
X X
H9 H11 H13 H15 H9 H11 H13 H15
H8 H10 H12 H14 H8 H10 H12 H14
P1 P1
P2 P2
P47 P4
Z Z
Mounting
On backplate
E21518
E21519
K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
K1 K2
K K
G7 G1 G9
X X
G6 G8
∅T
∅T4 (d)
Y Y

On rails
K1 K2
E21521
E21520
U (e) K K
G7 G1
X X
G6
∅T
Y Y

Front-panel cutout
Circuit breaker with ammeter module and voltage-presence indicator
∅T8
E21674
E21673
C30
C1
X X
C
C28
C27
Y
P6 R
Z R1
R16
R17
∅T8
E21678
E21677
C30
C23
X X
C22
C28
C27
Y
R16
P43
Z R17
R14
R15
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C22 C23 C27 C28 C29 C30 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9 H8 H9 H10
NS100/160/250N/H/L 28 76 28 76 56.5 124 30 78.5 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215 155.5 236 169
NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 41.5 126 56.5 185.5 30 122 100 200 200 300 213.5 327 227.5 355 242.5
Type H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 P1 P2 P4 P6 P43 P47 P48 R R1

NS100/160/250N/H/L 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 81 86 111 (1) 88 89 137 128 14.5 29
NS400/630N/H/L 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 95.5 110 168 112 112 162 154 31.5 63
Type R14 R15 R16 R17 ØT ØT4 U (2)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 48.5 97 46.5 93 6 22 y 32
NS400/630N/H/L 64.5 129 64.5 93 6 32 y 32
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS 250N/H/L

Dimensions, volumes Front accessories
Protection collar
Toggle protection collar
E21636
E21637
E21635
A D
Vigi-module protection collar Circuit breaker with Circuit breaker with

toggle or rotary handle motor-mechanism
module
E21639
E21464
E21640
E21638
52,4
91 35 53
Toggle cover E21655

E21654
E21653
M8
A3 D3
Front-panel escutcheons
For toggle
E21642
E21643
E21641
M2 M3
A1 D1 D2
For Vigi module

E21646
E21645
E21644
79 64
69 3,5 6,5

Front-panel escutcheons
For protection collar, motor mechanism or rotary handle
E21648
E21649
E21647
M6 M7
A2 D1 D2
For Vigi module with protection collar or ammeter module

E21651
E21652
E21650
93,5 80,5
157 3,5 6,5
Dimensions (mm)
Type A A1 A2 A3 D D1 D2 D3 M M2 M3 M6 M7 M8
NS100/160/250N/H/L 91 69 157 94 35 3.5 6.5 40 73 115 102 114 101 94
NS400/630N/H/L 123 102 189 35 134 3.5 6.5 60 123 155 142 164 151 134

Dimensions, Compact NS630b to 1600
volumes (fixed version)
Dimensions
Manual control
Front connection
E47973A
E47972B
(1)
254
163,5
327
508 200
X X
100
Z Y
107,5 99,5 (3P) 99,5
169,5 (4P)
205
(1) terminal shields are
F optional
Rear connection
105 (3P)
E47914A
175 (4P) 105

188
94
Y
E47913A
123
105
234 210
113 X X
92,5
117 123
Z F
107,5 35
140,5 70
146,5
205 14
Electrical control
Front and rear connection
105 (3P)
E47897A
175 (4P) 105

188
94
Y
E47896A
123
105
210 234 200

X X
117 100
123
F : Datum
Note.
Z Dimensions for front and rear
107,5 35
connection on electrically
169,5 70 operated devices are
175,5 99,5 (3P) identical to those for
169,5 (4P) 99,5
F manually operated devices.

Mounting
Front connection
On backplate On rails
Y
Y
E47898A
4 Ø6,5
4 Ø6,5
E47899A
200 200
X X
100 100
99,5 (3P)
169,5 (4P) 99,5
99,5 (3P)
169,5 (4P) 99,5
Rear connection
On backplate or rails
3P 4P
4 Ø6,5 6 Ø6,5
Y Y
E47969A
E47970A
106 106
44 44
234 234
X 44
X 44
106 106 117
117
35 35
70 70 70
100 100
200 270
Note.
Mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually
operated devices.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device
Z is the back plane of the device.

volumes (fixed version) (cont.)
Front-panel cutouts
Toggle control
124 mini
E59368
(A)
(1) (2)
Door cutout
(B) A B
(C) 150
194 mini (3P) 194 mini (3P)
E47901A
E59201B
(2) 194 mini 194 mini
264 mini (4P) 264 mini (4P)
Y Y 201 (1)
X 216 (1) X
266 (2)
X
108 (1) 100,5 (1)

133 (2)
90,5 (1)
107,5
194 (1) 97 (1)
244 (2) 122 (2) 181 (1)
140,5
146,5
F
Z
C 194 mini (3P)
E59200A
194 mini
264 mini (4P)
Y
119 (1)
144 (2)
95,5 (1)
108 (2)
F : Datum. 35,5 (1)
60,5 (2)
(1) Without escutcheon. 71 (1)
(2) With escutcheon. 121 (2)
Electrical control
Door cutout
A
E59369
(A) 150 mini

(1) (2) 194 mini (3P)
E47901A
194 mini
264 mini (4P)
Y
X 216 (1)
266 (2)
X
108 (1)
133 (2)
107,5
194 (1) 97 (1)
169,5 244 (2) 122 (2)
175,5
F
Z
F : Datum.
(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.

Rotary handle

Dimensions
(A) 124 mini

(1) (2)
(B)
(D) 180 mini
(2) Y
E47954
60°
E47955A
R80
195
X X
24
60°
107,5 25
154,5
160,5
189,5
229,5
F
Z
Door cutout
A B D
194 mini (3P) E47956A 194 mini (3P)

E47957
E47901A
194 mini 194 mini 194 mini

264 mini (4P) 264 mini (4P)
Y Y Y
201 (1) 201 (1)

X 216 (1) X X
266 (2)
100,5 (1)
100,5 (1)
108 (1)
133 (2)
90,5 (1) 90,5 (1)
194 (1) 97 (1) 130 (1)
244 (2) 122 (2) 181 (1)


Dimensions Door cutout
Y Y Ø51
E47960A
60°
E47958A
E47959A
R100
51
25,5
X X X
24 24
60° Ø5
Z 25
212,5 25
231,5 mini 25,5
605,5 maxi 51
F Note.
F : Datum Z is the back plane of the device.

volumes (withdrawable version)
Dimensions, mounting and cutouts
Dimensions
Manual control Electrical control
127,5 (3P) 160,5
E47944A
210 210 197,5 (4P)
E47943B
E59370B
mini mini 188
94
Y
70 (*) 46 (*)
199
X X X
45,5 123
69
5 5
90 (3P)
60 mini 60 mini 160 (4P) 90
F F
(*) Withdrawable position
Mounting
Bottom mounting on base plate or rails Vertical on uprights or backplate
Y
E47175B
Y
E47945
E47937A
X
4 Ø6,5
6 Ø6,5
150
X
24 25 50
25 100
100
216
231
F 90 (3P) F
90 109 (3P)
160 (4P) 109
179 (4P)
Cutouts
Door cutout Rear panel cutout
170 mini (3P)
E47177B
E47178A
230 mini
240 mini (4P)
Y Y
X 259 (1) X
303 (2) 234
117
109 (1)
130,8 (2) 102,5 (3P)
161 (1) 102,5
183 (2) 172,5 (4P)
259 (1)
307 (2)

Note.
F : Datum X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

Rotary handle

Dimensions
210
mini
Y
E47962A
E47963A
136 (*)
60°
R80
X X
93 24
60°
5
60 mini 25
F
(*) Withdrawable position.
Door cutout
E47964B
170 mini (3P) 230 mini

240 mini (4P)
Y
259 (1)
303 (2)
X
109 (1)
130,8 (2)
161 (1)
183 (2) (1) Without escutcheon.
259 (1)
307 (2) (2) With escutcheon.

Dimensions Door cutout
Y
E47966A
Y Ø51
E47967A
60°
E47965A
E47966A
R200
51
25,5
X X X
24 24
60° Ø5
207 mini 25
17 25
447 maxi
25,5
F
51
Note.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

volumes (fixed version)
Dimensions
Dimensions
(A) 132 mini

(B) Y
E59440
E59439
(C)
165
105
330 150 210

X X
75
18,5 163
38,5 170
132 340
162,5 180 (3P)
180
168,5 195 (3P) 295 (4P)
310 (4P) 195
222,5 210 (3P)
F 325 (4P) 210
368
Z
Mounting on rails
E59456A
Y
4 Ø12
X
150
75
195 (3P)
310 (4P) 195
Note.
F : Datum X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device

Door cutout
A B
Y Y
E59457
E59729A
X 216 (1) X 201
267 (2)
108 (1) 100,5
133,5 (2)
173 (1) 166

198,5 (2)
346 (1) 332
397 (2)
Y
E59458
X 119
95,9
73
146
Note.

volumes External modules
Control-wire connections to terminal block
E47683A
E47684A
S : 0,6 mm2
S : 2,5 mm2 2
8
Ø3,5
Only one wire per terminal.
External power-supply module (AD)
60 2 Ø6
E47690A
L4
73 60
L3 t
Inpu C
24VD
0A
ut
Outp C +
AD 22 24VD G2
G1
112
E47691A
75
L4
L3 t
Inpu C
24VD
0A
ut
Outp C +
AD 22 24VD G2
G1
Battery module (BAT)
60 2 Ø6
E47692A
60
H3 t
H4
+
73
Inpu C
24VD
ut
24V Outp C
BAT + 24VD H1
H2
E47693A
112
75
H4
H3 t
Inpu C +
24VD
ut
24V Outp C
BAT + 24VD H1
H2

MN delay unit
2 Ø4,2
57
E47694A
6
3 4 5
1 2
66
81 3 6
S
1
42
0.5
MN 1.5
3 MN
UVR r de R
dateu UV
Retardelay for
30 V Time
100/1C
AC/D
10 12 73
E47695A
2 3
1
6
3 4 5
2
73,5 1
72
S
3 6
1
0.5
MN 1.5
3 MN
UVR r de R
dateu UV
Retardelay for
30 V Time
100/1C
AC/D
10 12
2 3
1
46
Chassis communication module

Modbus Digipact
E47685A
E47686A
++ 90
Network
Réseau
CCM
modb
us
45
shield
A A
Fault
B B
A’ A’
B’ B’
Com.
Breaker
Disjoncteur
ss
Addre
.
sync
+
CE
CD
CT
58
54
External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protection

External sensor "MDGF" summing module
E58561
E47687A
200
130 90
45
F
MDG
45 76
150
58
106

volumes External modules (cont.)
External sensor for neutral

400/1600 A (NS630b to 1600)
4 Ø14
E47699
GND VN VC
H1 H2
35 76
T4 T3 T1 T2
177
208
1000/4000 A (NS1600b to 3200)
8 Ø14
H1 H2
E47701
VC
VN
GND
T4 44 127
T3
T1
T2
44 174 44
295
Installation
400/1600 (NS630b to NS1600) 1000/4000 A (NS1600b to NS3200)
E47697A
E47696

Rectangular sensor for earth leakage protection (Vigi)
280 x 115 mm window
E90300
E94309
470 x 160 mm window

E90301
E94310
Busbars I y 1600 A I y 3200 A

Window (mm) 280 x 115 470 x 160
Weight (kg) 14 18
Busbars path
280 x 115 window 470 x 160 window

Busbars spaced 70 mm centre-to-centre Busbars spaced 115 mm centre-to-centre
M1 M2 M3
E94311
E90307
2 bars 50 x 10
4 bars 100 x 5
M1 M2 M3
E94312
E90364
2 bars 100 x 5
4 bars 125 x 5

Dimensions, Accessories NS630b to 3200
volumes
Escutcheon
NS630b to NS1600 (fixed control)
A C
(A)
E59891A
(C) Y
E59885A
Y
E59886A
X X
275 154
X
27
27 27
131
27
253
NS630b to NS1600 (withdrawable control)

E59892A
Y
E59887A
X 313
X
27
27 13 27
317
NS1600b to NS3200 (fixed control)
Y
E94263
E94264
27
X 275
X
137,5
27 202,5
405

Compact NS Connection
Presentation 2
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and NSA160 206

Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 208
Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and
withdrawable versions) 210
Bars 212
Cables with lugs and bare cables 215
(plug-in and withdrawable versions) 216
Bars 216
Cables with lugs 218


Connection Compact NS80H-MA,
NSC100N and NSA160
Compact NS80H-MA
E21878
E21877
97
X X
48,5
Y
32 29,2 29,2
Compact NSC100N
30 30 34,5
E43405
E43406
48,5
X X
48,5
Y
45 34,5
90 83
Z
Compact NSA160
30 30 30 30 30 34,5
E21900
E62454
E21898
44 44
X X X
53 53
Y Y ➞
45 45 34,5
90 120 83
Z

Vigicompact NSC and NSA
Bottom connection
3 poles 4 poles
E62455
E43407
60,8 30 30 30 60,8 30 30 30
30 30 30 30 30
incoming incoming
X X
Y Y
outgoing outgoing
Top connection
3 poles 4 poles
60,8 30 30 30 60,8 30 30 30
E62456
E43408
30 30 30 30 30
incoming outgoing incoming outgoing
X X
Y Y

Connection Compact, Vigicompact
NS100 to 630 (fixed version)
Connection dimensions
P21
E21748
P13
E21747
G4
X X
G5
G19
Y
Z K1 K1 K1
Front connection
Terminals
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Z
E21554
E21750
Z
10,5
14
E35578
70 113,5
X
X
Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
E21752
Z
E21751
E21553
Z Z
46,5
19
14
70 113,5
113,5
X
X X
Rear connection
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
10
E21561
E21756
15 ∅13 ∅23,2
E21755
∅8,6 ∅20
13 14
18 30
70
43 short RC 50 short RC 113,5
88 long RC X 115 long RC X
Z Z
6 8

Connection with accessories
Right-angle terminal extensions (upstream only) Straight or edgewise terminal extensions
NS100/160/250 NS100/160/250
37,5
E21563
4
E21556
39,5 (b)
41 Z
20,5 30
E35577
70 70
Z
E35580
X X
(b) Vigi module or NS250.
NS400/630
View F
E21754
NS400/630 F
8 Z
61
E21758
58
Z 42
34 8
113,5
113,5
X
X
Distribution connectors (interphase barriers mandatory) Spreader

NS100/160/250
E21565
E21558
K10 K9
E21557
K8 K8 K8 K8 K8
G27
X
G26
70
E21566
X X
41
64,5 Y Y
66,5 (b)
Z
(b) Vigi module or NS250.
Dimensions (mm)
Type G4 G5 G19 G26 G27 K1 K8 K9 K10 P13 P21
NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 140 215 30 41 35 45 159 114 19.5 (1)
NS400/630N/H/L 113.5 227 327 39 54 45 52.5 187.5 135 26 44
52,5 67,5 70 240 170
(1) P13 = 21.5 mm for NS250N/H/L and Vigi MH module
Note.
For dimensions of conductors, see pages 98 and 99.

Connection Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630
Plug-in base or chassis

K1 K1 K1
E21570
E21569
X
X
Z
Y
Front connection
Terminals
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
E21571
Mounting on backplate or on rails (1) With spreaders
42 8
E21939
(*) P21
P21 E
Z
E21572
G32
G32 G31
G31 195,5
210,5
X X
(1) For backplate mounting, the insulating screen, supplied
with the plug-in base, must be installed.
Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Mounting on backplate or on rails (1) With spreaders
94
E21941
(*)
68
Z
P28
E21581
E21580
G31
G32
G34 202
X X
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory.

Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
E21583
Mounting through backplate or on rails

(*)
109
E21942
83
P29
P30
Z
E21582
Z
G32
G34
X 66 X
94
Rear connection
Mounting through backplate or on rails
E21573
E21574
(*) P22 Z
P23
G35 P24
G33 P25
Mounting on backplate
Right-angle extensions (mounted down and out)
Long, insulated right-angle
E21577
(*)
P26 Z terminal extensions are
P27 mandatory.
E21576
G33
X
Right-angle extensions (mounted up and out)
(*)
E21579
P26 Z
P27
E21578
G35
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory. X
Dimensions (mm)
Type E G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 K1 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30
NS100/160/250N/H/L 4 108.5 100 63.5 110 80.5 35 19 75.5 67 49 57.5 75.5 67 26.5 54.5 36.5
NS400/630N/H/L 6 171 156.5 104 129 45 26 114.5 100.5 82.5 96.5 108.5 94.5

Connection Compact NS630b to 1600
(fixed version)
Bars
Horizontal rear connection
E47904A
43,5
E47905A
70 70 70
15
E47918A
123
67,5
N Y
X 44
E47201B
67,5
25 9,5 12,5
123
15 60
12,5
31
2 Ø11
F
Z

43,5 70 70 70
E47907A
E47908A
15
E47919A
View A
97
X N Y
97
60
E47205B
12,5
12,5 9,5
31
F 44
Z
25
2 Ø11
View A detail.
Front connection
E47910A
70 70 70
30
E47916A
E47911B
163,5
129
N Y
View A
X
Top terminal Bottom terminal
129
E47971A
44
9,5
163,5 25 2 vis M10 15
15
16,5 25 15
2 vis M10 15 9,5
F 44
Z View A detail.
F : Datum.
Note.
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

Front connection with spreaders
E47921A
E47922A
70 70
25 25
E47920A
196
181
Y 15
View A
E47923A
95 95 95
181 70 70 70
196
12,5 12,5
N Y 15
31,5
View A
F
Z
Rear connection with spreaders

E47925A
E47924A
98 95 95
E47926A
70 70
123
15
82,5
X 52,5
15
Y
123
E47927A
95 95 95
83
70 70 70
F
Z 12,5 12,5
N Y
Spreader detail
Middle left or middle right Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
spreader for 4P
E47234A
E47292A
E47293A
E47294A
77 77 77 77
38,5 38,5 38,5 38,5
13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5
25 = = 25 = = 25 = = 25 = =
30 30 30 30
82 52 82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15
15
5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52
View A detail
Note.
F : Datum. X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

(fixed version) (cont.)
Bars
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters
E47929A
E47930A
E47928A
70 70 70
15
View A
200
N Y
430
X
E47218A
200 89 12,5
25 = = 15
21 (1)
101 21
3 Ø11
10
62,5 15 20
F
Z View A detail.
F : Datum.
Note.
(1) two mounting possibilities for vertical-connection adapters
(pitch 21 mm).

Cables with lugs and bare cables
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters

15
E47933A
E47931
70 70 70
E47932A
View A
250
N Y
200
15
530
X 184
E47230A
17 50 50 50
200
250 80 50
5 Ø13 5 Ø11
View A detail.
15
10
150
F
Z
Fixed circuit breaker with 4-cable bare-cable connectors (240 mm2)
70 70 70
E59203A
E59204A
E59202A
199 206,5
N Y
398 413
X 4 Ø21,5
E59205A
199 206,5
26 63
26
16,5 54
35
61
F
Z
F : Datum.

Bars
Horizontal rear connection
E47181A
E47179A
E47948A
70 70 70
49
15
67,5
228
X N Y
67,5
114
E47201B
44
25 9,5 12,5
267,5 15
F 60
12,5
2 Ø11
70 70 70
E47182A
E47940A
49 15
View A
E47184A
97
X
97 N Y
E47205B
60
12,5
267,5 12,5 9,5
F
44
25
2 Ø11
View A detail.
Front connection
E47941A
View A
E47185A
15 12,5 70 70 70
E47187A
171
N Y
336
X Top terminal Bottom terminal
140 44
9,5 25 37,9 9,5
2 Ø11
E47188B
26
235 12,5 83 100
131 52
F
26
2 Ø11
25
9,5
37,9 9,5 44
F : Datum. View A detail.
Note.

Front connection with spreaders
E47223A
E47952A
E47225A
95 95
View A
70 70
238
223
Y
X
E47226A
95 95 95
207
70 70 70
192
View A
12,5 12,5
250
F
N Y
Spreader detail
Middle left or middle right Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
spreader for 4P
E47234A
E47292A
E47293A
E47294A
77 77 77 77
38,5 38,5 38,5 38,5
13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5
25 = = 25 = = 25 = = 25 = =
30 30 30 30
82 52 82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15
15
5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52
View A detail.
F : Datum.

(plug-in and withdrawable versions) (cont.)
Cables with lugs
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters

15 70 70 70
View A
E47953A
15
E47227
50
E47229A
71
292
21
171
N Y 15
583 184
X 17 50 50 50
E47230A
140
21 80 50
261
71 5 Ø13 5 Ø11
View A detail
50
193,5 15
F
F : Datum.
Note.

(fixed version)
Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)

115 115 115
E59460
E59461A
165
150
E59459A
N Y
View A
OFF
OFF
X
E59462B
76 25
150 13 = =
165 =
=
3 Ø11
15
View A detail
20
F
Z
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters (NS1600b to 2500)

E94968
E59736A
E59737
115 115 115

80 80 80 80
230
142,5
N Y View A
X
Z
OFF
OFF
142,5 4 Ø11
E59735
230
25
25 60 100
25
20
25
F 20 12,5 20
40
45 15 25 25
60 80
View A detail.
Front connection (NS3200)

E59740
115 115 115

E59739A
E59741A
230
142,5
N Y View A
X
OFF
Z 4 Ø11
OFF
142,5
E59735
230 25
25 60 100
25
20
20 12,5 20
25
F 45 15 25 25
40
60 80
Note.
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. View A detail.

Compact NS Electrical diagrams
Presentation 2
Connection 205
Compact NSC100, Compact NS80H-MA 222

Indication contacts 222
Early-make contacts 223
Compact NSA160 224
Motor mechanism (automatic reset) 228
Motor mechanism (remote reset) 230
Motor mechanism (local reset) 232
Early-make contacts 234
Motor protection - Trip unit STR22/43ME 236
Fixed circuit breakers 240
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers 242
Communications option 24 V DC external power supply 244
Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection, neutral protection, 246
zone selective interlocking
Fixed circuit breakers 248


Electrical diagrams Compact NSC100
Compact NS80H-MA
Indication contacts
The diagram is shown with circuits de-

energised, all devices open, connected and
charged and relays in the normal position.
With OF1 and CAO1 With OF1 and CAF1/CAF2

YE
VT
WH
RD
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 12 14
E43821
E43822
Q OF1 CAO1 OF1 CAF1 CAF2
trip unit
MN (1)
MX SD
D4 C2 91 11 11
WH
GY
RD
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2)
With MN With MX
E43823
- CN 1 + - CN 1 +
E43824
CN1 CN1
CN2 - CN 2 – CN2 - CN 2 –
F1 F1
tripping order tripping order

H1 H1
D1 92 94 C1 92 94
Q Q
trip unit trip unit
MN MX
SD SD
D4 91 C2 91
Symbols Colour code for auxiliary wiring

Q Compact NS RD red
SD trip indication contact GN green
OF ON / OFF indication contact BK black
MN undervoltage release BL blue
MX shunt release WH white
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle
CAF early-make contact of rotary handle
XI terminal block for CAF wiring (must be ordered)
F1 breaker for the protection of MN/MX
H1 lamp signalling tripped position

Early-make contacts
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, With MN

reset must be carried out locally and
manually. CN1 - CN1 +
tripping
(1)
CN2 - CN2 – unit
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6
WH
WH
WH
RD
RD
BL
D1
E43831
WH
D1 C1
Q CAF1 CAF2
trip unit
MN
D4
BL
D4
With MN + SD
CN1 - CN1 +
(1) trippinng
order
CN2 - CN2 –
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6
WH
GN
WH
WH
RD
RD
BK
BL
D1 92 94
E43830
WH
GN
RD
D1 C1 92 94
Q CAF1 CAF2
trip unit
MN
SD
D4 91
BL
BL
D4 91
(1) independent auxiliary source.

Remark
NS80H-MA and NSC100 circuit breakers are not plug-in or
withdrawable devices. As a result, there is no automatic
auxiliary connector. Connections are made directly to the
device.

Electrical diagrams Compact NSA160
Indication contacts
The diagram is shown with circuits de- With OF1

D1 C1 92 94 12 14
E62467
Q OF1 CAO1
trip unit
MN (1)
MX SD
D4 C2 91 11
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2)
Symbols
Q Compact NS
SD trip indication contact
OF ON / OFF indication contact
MX shunt release
XI terminal block for CAF wiring (must be ordered)
F1 breaker for the protection of MN/MX
H1 lamp signalling tripped position
Colour code for auxiliary wiring

RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
WH white

With MN
E43823
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 –
F1
tripping order
H1
D1 92 94
trip unit
MN
SD
D4 91
With MX
E43824
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 –
F1
tripping order
H1
C1 92 94
trip unit
MX
SD
C2 91

Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630
Indication contacts
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Compact NS100 to 250

Manually operated circuit breaker
WH
GY
GY
E18916
VT
VT
RD
YE
VT
314 312 352 354 D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 82 84
WH
GN
GN
RD
RD
YE
YE
VT
VT
CE
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 72 74 82 84
Q OF1 OF2 CAF1 CAF2 CAO1
trip unit
SDE
MN (1) (2)
MX SD
Id
SDV
D4 C2 91 11 21 71 81
OR
GY
GY
BK
BK
BL
CD
311 351 D4 C2 91 11 21 81
WH
RD
GY
YE
YE
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2).

(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF2 contacts can be installed in the
circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.
Circuit breaker with motor mechanism

GY
GY
VT
VT
E18917
314 312 352 354 D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 84 A2 A4 B4
GN (3)
WH
WH
GN
OR
RD
YE
YE
VT
VT
BL
CE
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 72 74 82 RD 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
Q OF OF2
MT
trip unit
SDE
MN (1) (2)
MX SD
BK (3)
Id
SDV
D4 C2 91 11 21 71 81 A1 L1
GN
OR
GY
GY
BK
BK
BL
CD
311 351 D4 C2 91 11 21 A1 L1
YE
YE
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2).

(3) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 250
SDE fault indication contact
SDV earth-fault indication contact Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breaker
OF ON / OFF indication contact
Automatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors
MX shunt release (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2) (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2)
MT motor-mechanism module
E43817
E43816
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle 11 12 14 21

71
22
72
24
74 B4 24 84 D4 14 94
74
CE connected-position carriage switch 91 92 94 81 82 84 22 82
A1 L1 A4 72 L1 C2 12 92
CD disconnected-position carriage switch
A2 21 81 D1 11 91
Colour code for auxiliary wiring 71 A1 C1
RD red
GN green Fixed part (rear view).
BK black
VT violet D1
C1 C2 D4 A2 A4 B4
YE yellow
GY grey Fixed part
BL blue (front view looking into base)
OR orange
WH white

Manually operated circuit breaker
GY
GY
E22042
VT
VT
WH
RD
YE
VT
314 312 352 354 Z11 e+ T1 D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84
WH
GN
OR
GN
GN
RD
RD
BK
YE
YE
YE
VT
VT
VT
CE
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 72 74 82 84
Q OF1 OF2 OF3 CAF1 CAF2 CAO1
trip unit (3)

SDE
MN (1) (2)
MX SD
Id SDV
D4 C2 91 11 21 31 71 81
WH
OR
RD
GY
GY
GY
BK
BL
BL
CD
311 351 Z12 e- T2 D4 C2 91 11 21 31 81
WH
RD
GY
YE
YE
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2).

(3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only.
Circuit breaker with motor mechanism

GY
GY
E22043
VT
VT
314 312 352 354 Z11 e+ T1 D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 84 A2 A4 B4
GN (4)
WH
WH
GN
OR
GN
OR
RD
BK
YE
YE
YE
VT
VT
VT
BL
CE
RD
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 72 74 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
Q OF1 OF2 OF3
trip unit (3) MT

SDE
MN (1) (2)
MX SD
BK (4)
Id SDV
D4 C2 91 11 21 31 71 81 A1 L1
WH
GN
OR
GY
GY
GY
RD
BK
BK
BL
BL
CD
311 351 Z12 e- T2 D4 C2 91 11 21 31 A1 L1
YE
YE
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2).

(3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only.
Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breaker

Symbols Automatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors
SD trip indication contact (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2) (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2)
E43817
E43818
31 32 34 _
SDV earth-fault indication contact 11 12 14 21 22 24 71 72 74 T2 24 e
OF ON / OFF indication contact _
MN undervoltage release 91 92 94 81
A1
82
L1 84 Z11 e+ e T1 22 e+
MX shunt release
MT motor-mechanism module Z12 21 Z11
B4 34 84 D4 14 94
CE connected-position carriage switch 74
CD disconnected-position carriage switch D1
C1 C2 D4 A2 A4 B4 Z12 T1 R1 T2 R2 32 82
A4 72 L1 C2 12 92
RD red Fixed part 31 81 D1
A2 71 A1 C1 11 91
GN green (front view looking into base)
BK black
Fixed part (rear view).
VT violet
YE yellow
GY grey
BL blue
OR orange
WH white

Motor mechanism
(automatic reset)
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Automatic reset with MN

E43825
- CN1 +
charged and relays in the normal position. CN1
CN2 - CN2 –
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, F1

manually.
F O
tripping H1 H2
order
(2)
D1 A2 A4 B4
RD
WH
GN (1)
WH
OR
BL
D1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
trip unit
SDE
MN
BK (1)
D4 81 A1 L1
GN
BK
BL
D4 A1 L1

(2) the tripping order must lock out the closing order.
Automatic reset with MX

E43826
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
F O
tripping H1 H2
order (2)
C1 A2 A4 B4
RD
WH
WH
GN (1)
OR
BL
C1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
Symbols Q
SDE fault indication contact trip unit MT
MT motor-mechanism module SDE
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module circuits MX

H1 lamp signalling an electrical fault BK (1)
H2 lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual position
F closing order
O opening order orders must not be simultaneous C2 81 A1 L1
OR
GN
(must be > 150 ms)

BK

RD red
C2 A1 L1
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white

Automatic reset without auxiliary
E43827
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
F O
H1 H2
A2 A4 B4
RD
WH
GN (1)
OR
BL
82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
trip unit MT
SDE
BK (1)
81 A1 L1
GN
BK
A1 L1
Control via switch or relay

With MN/MX
Controlled by switch Controlled by relay
E43839
E43838
1 2 F O F O
locked by locked by
tripping tripping
order order
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
82 81 82 81
Without auxiliary
E43841
E43840
1 2 F O F O
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
82 81 82 81

Motor mechanism
(remote reset)
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Remote reset with MN

E43834
charged and relays in the normal position. CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –

manually.
R F O
tripping H2
order
(3)
D1 84 A2 A4 B4
RD
WH
WH
OR
(1)
BL
D1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
trip unit
(2) SDE
MN
D4 81 A1 L1
BL
GN
BK
D4 A1 L1
Remote reset with MX

E43835
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
R F O
tripping H2
order
(3)
C1 84 A2 A4 B4
(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct

RD
WH
WH
(1)
OR
BL
operation.
(2) connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84. C1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
Symbols
Q
MN undervoltage release MT
trip unit
MX shunt release (2) SDE
MT motor-mechanism module MX
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module
circuits and MN/MX
R reset order
C2 81 A1 L1
(must be > 150 ms) orders
OR
GN
BK
F closing order must not

O opening order be simultaneous
(must be > 150 ms,
C2 A1 L1
has priority over F order)
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white

Remote reset without auxiliary
E43836
CN1 - CN1 + (1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct

CN2 - CN2 – operation.
(2) connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84.
F1
R F O
H2
84 A2 A4 B4
RD
WH
OR
(1) BL
82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
trip unit
(2) SDE
81 A1 L1
GN
BK
A1 L1

With MN/MX
E43915
E43914
1 2 F O F O
R R
locked by locked by
tripping tripping
order order
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81
Without auxiliary
E43917
E43916
1 2 F O F O
R R
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81

Motor mechanism
(local reset)
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Local reset with MN

E43837
- CN1 +
charged and relays in the normal position. CN1
CN2 - CN2 –

manually.
F O
H1 H2
tripping
order
D1 84 A2 A4 B4
WH
WH
OR
RD
BL
D1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
trip unit
SDE
(2)
MN
(1)
D4 81 A1 L1
GN
BK
BL
D4 A1 L1
Local reset with MX

E43919
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
F O
H1 H2
tripping
order
D1 84 A2 A4 B4
WH
WH
OR
RD
BL
D1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
trip unit
SDE
(2)
(1) (2) required to ensure correct indication of an electrical MX
fault. (1)
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 630 D4 81 A1 L1
GN
BK
BL
MX shunt release
D4 A1 L1
MT motor-mechanism module
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module
circuits and MN/MX
H1 lamp signalling an electrical fault
F closing order orders
O opening order must not
(must be > 150 ms, be simultaneous
has priority over F order)
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white

Local reset without auxiliary
E43920
CN1 - CN1 + (1) (2) required to ensure correct indication of an electrical

CN2 - CN2 –
fault.
F1
F O
H1 H2
84 A2 A4 B4
WH
OR
RD
BL
82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
trip unit
SDE
(2)
(1)
81 A1 L1
GN
BK
A1 L1

With MN/MX
E43845
E43844
1 2 F O F O
locked by locked by
tripping tripping
order order
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81
Without auxiliary
E43912
E43913
1 2 F O F O
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81

Early-make contacts
The diagram is shown with circuits de- With MN

E43831
charged and relays in the normal position. CN1 - CN1 +
(1) tripping
CN2 - CN2 – order
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, X1

reset must be carried out locally and 1 2 3 4 5 6
manually.
WH
WH
WH
RD
RD
BL
D1
WH
D1 C1
Q CAF1 CAF2
trip unit
MN
D4
BL
D4
(1) independent auxiliary source
Symbols
Q Compact NS
XI terminal block for CAF wiring
(must be ordered)
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
WH white

With MN + SD
E43830
CN1 - CN1 +
(1) trippinng
order
CN2 - CN2 –
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6
WH
GN
WH
WH
RD
RD
BK
BL
D1 92 94
WH
GN
RD
D1 C1 92 94
Q CAF1 CAF2
trip unit
MN
SD
D4 91
BL
BL
D4 91
(1) independent auxiliary source.

Motor protection
Trip unit STR22/43ME

Thermal-fault indication
E28434
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
D1
BP1
WH
97 13 43
KA1 KA1
14 44
trip unit
SDTAM
98
BL
D4
A1 X1
KAI H1
A2 X2
Symbols
F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuit
SDTAM thermal-fault early-break signal
BP1 SDTAM reset button
KA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
CA...DN31 or CA...DN22
H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault
BL blue
WH white

Automatic operation
E28435
I
overload
O
I
SDTAM
O
I
BP1
O
I
H1
O
I
Q
O
300 ms IQ
tr
tr overload (long-time) protection tripping time Legend

overload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold) b O: OFF (circuit open)
IQ closing order for circuit breaker Q b I: ON (circuit closed)
Note. b : either ON or OFF
For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens.
The above automatic control sequence is not run.

Motor protection
Trip unit STR22/43ME

Thermal-fault indication and tripping

E43828
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
D1
WH
97
21 42
Q
BP1 KA1 KA1
22 44
trip unit
SDTAM
(1)
98
BL
D4
E1
A1 A1 X1
KA1 KM1 H1
KM1
A2 KA2 A2 X2
E2
(1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between 22 and A1.
Symbols
F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuit
SDTAM thermal-fault early-break signal
BP1 SDTAM reset button
KA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
CA...DN31 or CA...DN22
KA2 mechanical latching unit -
Telemecanique LA6 DK1
RHK bistable relay - Telemecanique
RHK-41
H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault
KM1 power contactor
BL blue
WH white

Automatic operation
E28437
I
overload
O
tr
I
SDTAM
O
I
BP1
O
I
H1
O
I
KM1
O
I
Q
O
tr overload (long-time) protection tripping time Legend

overload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold) b O: OFF (circuit open)
Note. b I: ON (circuit closed)
For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens. b : either ON or OFF
The above automatic control sequence is not run.
Same automatic system using a bistable relay

E43829
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
D1
BP1
D4
E4
C
RHK
12 11 14 22 21 24 X
(1)
A1 X1
KM1 H1
A2 X2
(1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between

12 and A1.

Electrical diagrams Compact NS630b to 1600

Power Control unit Remote operation
power upstream cb downstream cb

N L1 L2 L3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
AT BPO BPF
D2
C2
A4
A2
B4
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Q motor-mechanism
MN MX module
I
Micrologic
or
E59041
E59040
D1
C1
A1
F2+
M1
M2
T2
T3
T1/M3
T4/F1
24 V DC
– (basic) A Control unit Remote operation
b b E1-E6 communication MN : undervoltage release

or
b Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking: MX : shunt release
Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE
Z2 = ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE Motor-mechanism module (*)
Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) A4 : electrical opening order
Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault) A2 : electrical closing order
M1 = Vigi module input B4, A1 : power supply for control devices and gear motor
(Micrologic 7)
b T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral;
M2, M3 = Vigi module input (*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC
(Micrologic 7) (380 V motor + additional resistor)
CN1 - 440/480 V
E59039A
b F2+, F1- external 24 V DC 9 11

power supply R
A4 A2 B4
–: basic Micrologic control unit.
A: digital ammeter.
motor-mechanism
module
A1
CN2 - 440/480 V

Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (manual operation)
E59296A
E59043
yellow
brown
white
black
blue
red
open closed fault fault closed open
E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
MN/MX
OF1
11 12 14
M1M2 M3 F1 F2 D1/C1
522
512
524
514
542
532
544
534
32
22
12
82
84
92
94
34
24
14
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T2 T3 T4
D2/C2 OF2
21 22 24
OF3
31 32 34
SD
91 92 94
OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO2 CAO1
521
511
541
531
31
21
11
91
81
CAF1 CAF2 CAO1 CAO2 81
531 541 511 521 82
532 542 512 522 84
534 544 514 524 SDE
Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (electrical operation)
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts

E59044
yellow
brown
white
black
blue
red
SDE : fault-trip indication contact

(short-circuit, overload, earth fault) E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
MN/MX
SD : trip indication contact M1M2 M3 F1 F2 D1/C1
(manual operation) Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T2 T3 T4
D2/C2
CAF2/CAF1 : early-make contact
(rotary handle)
CAO2 / CAO1 : early-break contact

SDE OF3 OF2 OF1
(rotary handle)
81 31 21 11
82 32 22 12
84 34 24 14
B4 A4 A2 A1

Plug-in / withdrawable
circuit breakers

E59037B
power
E59730
upstream cb downstream cb
N L1 L2 L3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
AT BPO BPF
D2
C2
B4
A4
A2
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Q motor-mechanism
MN MX module
I
Micrologic
or
F2+
M1
M2
T2
T3
T1/M3
D1
C1
A1
T4/F1
24 V DC
Control unit Remote operation

Terminal-block marking Com UC1 UC2 UC3 MN / MX MT2 MT1
E5 E6 Z5 M1 M2 M3 F2+ D2 C2 A4 A2
E3 E4 Z3 Z4 T3 T4 B4
E1 E2 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 F1 – D1 C1 A1
b b Com: E1-E6 communication MN : undervoltage release

or
b UC1 : Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking: MX : shunt release
Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE
Z2 = ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE Motor-mechanism module (*)
Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) MT2 : A4 : electrical opening order
Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault)
M1 = Vigi module input MT1 : A2 : electrical closing order
(Micrologic 7) B4, A1 : power supply for control devices
b UC2 : T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral; and gear motor (MCH)
M2, M3 = Vigi module input
(*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC
(Micrologic 7)
(380 V motor + additional resistor)
E59039
b UC3 : F2+, F1- external 24 V DC CN1 - 440/480 V

9 11
power supply
R
A4 A2 B4
A: digital ammeter.
motor-mechanism
module
A1
CN2 - 440/480 V

Indication contacts Carriage switches
E59295A
E47075A
E46134A
E47074A
open closed fault fault closed open disconnected connected Test
332
334
322
324
312
314
822
824
812
814
522
512
524
514
542
532
914
544
534
912
32
22
12
82
84
92
94
34
24
14
OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO2 CAO1 CT1

CD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1
321
331
311
821
811
911
521
511
541
531
31
21
11
91
81

CAF2 CAF1 SDE SD CAO2 CAO1 OF3 OF2 OF1 CD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1 CT1
544 534 84 94 524 514 34 24 14 824 814 334 324 314 914
542 532 82 92 522 512 32 22 12 822 812 332 322 312 912
541 531 81 91 521 511 31 21 11

821 811 331 321 311 911

CD2 : disconnected CE3 : connected CT1 : test
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts CD1 position CE2 position position
CE1
(short-circuit, overload, earth fault)
SD : trip indication contact

(manual operation)
CAF2/CAF1 : early-make contact

(rotary handle)
CAO2 / CAO1 : early-break contact

(rotary handle)
Legend
Connected
(only one wire per connection point).

Communications option
24 V DC external power supply
Connection of the communications option

E59303
motor-mechanism
module
914 812 314 912 812 312
N L1 L2 L3 manual opening order
operation
OF closing order
SDE OF
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
SD SDE 911 811 311 911 811 311
CT CD CE CT CD CE
+ +
Q B'
A'
Modbus Digipact
I device B COM craddle COM craddle
Micrologic communication A BB
module BB
+
shield
BB
BB
B' A' B A +
CCP 303
(2)
F2+
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
M1
M2
T1/M3
T2
T3
T4/F1
CCP 303
5
4
H1 H2
BAT
3 Modbus Digipact
module junction junction
(1) 2
block block
1 CJB306
H3 H4 (2)
0
G1 G2
yellow
brown
24 V
black
white
AD
blue
0V
red
module
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 0V 24 V
L3 L4
+ A B A' B' Modbus 24 VDC 24 VDC
communication
+ / / BB BB + Digipact 1A
power supply
DC 150
110/240 V AC E3 / E4 twisted pair

24/125 V DC E5 / E6 twisted pair
None of the control-unit protection functions require an auxiliary source. However, the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module) is
required for certain operating configurations as indicated in the table below.
Circuit breaker Closed Open
Protection function no no
Display function no (3) yes
Circuit-breaker status indications and control no no
communications bus
The communications bus requires its own 24 V DC power source (E1, E2). This source is not
the same as the 24 V DC external power-supply module (F1-, F2+).
If the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module) is used, the maximum cable length between
(1) Drawout device equipped with Com chassis modbus. the 24 V DC external power supply (G1, G2) and the Micrologic control unit (F1-, F2+) is ten
(2) Fixed device or draw-out device without Com chassis metres.
Digipact. The BAT battery module, mounted in series upstream of the AD module, ensures an
(3) except if current < 20 % In. uninterrupted supply of power if the AD module power supply fails.

Examples using the COM communications option
Switchboard display unit CDM303 + CSD309

This architecture provides remote display of the d < 1 km
E47976
variables managed by Micrologic control units DMB300 5 CCP303
equipped with the eco COM Modbus module. 1
4
b I (Micrologic A) 2
No programming is required. 3
3
4 I U P ?
For Micrologic A control unit (if current < 20 % In), it is
switchboard 2
recommended to use the 24 VDC external power display unit
supply (AD module). 1
24 V
0V
Modbus power circuit
junction 24 VDC breaker
block 1A
CJB 306
Communicating switchboard
This configuration provides remote display and control
of Compact equipped with the Modbus or Digipact
COM module. The Digipact bus can be combined with
the Modbus bus.
E94381
Software PC running PC running

Micrologic utilities Micrologic utilities
SMS SMS
PLC PLC
TCP/IP
Communication
interface
RS 232C Ethernet
RS 485 RS 485
Bus Modbus Bus Modbus
communication
Bus
Data
concentrator DC150
Device
UA150 SC150 PM150 Compact Compact PM500

Sepam Vigilohm Altivar
source control measure COM Digipact COM Modbus measure
change-ower interface
Digipact Bus Modbus Bus

Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection
Neutral protection
Zone selective interlocking
External sensor (CT) for residual earth-fault protection
E59305
Connection of current-transformer secondary N L1 L2 L3
circuit for external neutral
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Compact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A:
b shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs
b T1 twisted with T2
b T3 twisted with T4
b shielding connected to GND on one end only
b maximum length 10 meters
b cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2
b recommended cable: Belden 9552 or equivalent.
Q
If supply is via the top, follow the shematics.
If supply is via the bottom, control wiring is identical; I
for the power wiring, H1 is connected to the source Micrologic 6
side, H2 to the load side. U
For four-pole versions, for residual earth-fault
protection, the current transformer for the external
neutral is not necessary.
F2+
T1
M3
M1
M2
T2
T3
F1
H2
VC VN GND T4 T3 T1 T2
H1
External transformer for source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection
Connection of the secondary circuit

b unshielded cable with 1 twisted pair
b maximum length 150 metres
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
b cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2
b recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent.
I
Micrologic 6
F2+
M1
M2
M3/T1
T2
T3
F1 /T4
H1 X1 12 5 6 7 10 11
1 MDGF module 9
E59306
H2 X2 3 13 14 8
PE

Earth-leakage protection
N L1 L2 L3
E59307A
Connection of the rectangular-sensor secondary
circuit
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
use the cable shipped with the rectangular sensor.
I
Micrologic 7
U
F2+
M1
M2
M3/T1
T2
T3
F1 /T4
M1
M2
M3
Neutral protection
b three pole circuit breaker:

v neutral protection is impossible.
b four pole circuit breaker:
v Compact equipped with Micrologic A
v the current transformer for external neutral is not
necessary.
Zone selective interlocking

E47975B
A pilot wire interconnects a number of circuit breakers

equipped with Micrologic A control units, as illustrated in the upstream A Z1
diagram above. circuit breaker Z2 tsd = 0,3
The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream and Z3
checks for a signal arriving from downstream. If there is a Z4
signal from downstream, the circuit breaker remains closed Z5
for the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signal
from downstream, the circuit breaker opens immediately, fault 1
whatever the tripping-delay setting.
Fault 1.
Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives no
signal from downstream, it immediately opens in spite of its
tripping delay set to 0.3. B Z1
Fault 2. Z2
Z3 tsd = 0,2
Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker A
receives a signal from B and remains closed for the full Z4
duration of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Circuit breaker B does Z5
not receive a signal from downstream and opens immediately,
in spite of its tripping delay set to 0.2. fault 2
Z1 downstream Z1
Z2 circuit breaker Z2
Z3 Z3
Z4 Z4
Z5 Z5
Note. The maximum permissible distance between two

devices is 3000 metres and the maximum number of devices
is 100.


power upstream cb downstream cb

N L1 L2 L3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
AT
D2
C2
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Q
MN MX
I
Micrologic
or
E59463A
E59040
D1
C1
F2+
M1
M2
T2
T3
T1/M3
T4/F1
24 V DC
b b E1-E6 communication MN : undervoltage release

or
b Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking: MX : shunt release
Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE
Z2 = ZSI OUT ; Z3 = ZSI IN SOURCE
Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time)
Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault)
M1 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
b T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral;
M2, M3 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
b F2+, F1- external 24 V DC power

supply

A: digital ammeter.

Indication contacts Terminal-block marking
E59464A
E59465A
E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
MN/MX
OF1
open closed fault fault 11 12 14
M1M2 M3 F1 F2 D1/C1
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T2 T3 T4
D2/C2 OF2
21 22 24
32
22
12
82
84
92
94
34
24
14
OF3
31 32 34
SD
91 92 94
OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD

31
21
11
91
81
81
82
84
SDE
Indication contacts
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : ON / OFF indication contacts

(short-circuit, overload, earth fault)
SD : trip indication contact

Compact NS Additional characteristics
Presentation 2
Connection 205
Tripping curves 252

Compact NSC100 252
Compact NS80H-MA 253
Compact NSA160 254
Compact NB100 to 600 255
Compact NS100 to 250 protection of distribution systems 258
Compact NS100 to 250 motor-starter protection 259
Compact NS400 to 630 protection of distribution systems 260
Compact NS400 to 630 motor-starter protection 261
Reflex tripping 263
Current-limiting curves 264

Additional characteristics Tripping curves
Compact NSC100
16…40 A 50…80 A
E94504
10 000
E94503
10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 1
16 A : Im = 37,5 x In
.5 .5 50 A : Im = 20 x In
20 A : Im = 30 x In
.2 .2 63 A : Im = 16 x In
25 A : Im = 24 x In
70 A : Im = 14,3 x In
.1 32 A : Im = 19 x In .1
80 A : Im = 12,5 x In
.05 40 A : Im = 15 x In .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
100 A
10 000
E94505
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
1 100 A : Im = 12,5 x In
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir

Compact NS80H-MA
MA1.5…MA80
10 000
E28466
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
Im = 6…14 x In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir

Compact NSA160
16…40 A 50…80 A
E94506
E94507
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 1
16 A : Im = 37,5 x In
.5 .5
50 A : Im = 20 x In
25 A : Im = 24 x In
.2 .2 63 A : Im = 16 x In
32 A : Im = 19 x In
.1 .1 80 A : Im = 12,5 x In
40 A : Im = 15 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
100 A 125…160 A
E94508
E94509
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5 160 A : Im = 7,8 x In
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 100 A : Im = 12,5 x In 1 125 A : Im = 10 x In
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir

Protection of distribution systems
TM magnetic trip units

TM16D / TM16G TM25D / TM25G
E28453
E28452
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
TM16D : 12 x In TM25D : 12 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
TM16G : 4 x In TM25G :
.1 .1 3.2 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 reflex tripping : .01 reflex tripping :
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
TM32D / TM40D / TM40G TM50D / TM63D / TM63G

E28454
10 000 10 000
E28455
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
TM40D : 12 x In TM63D : 8 x In
1 1
.5 .5
TM50D : 10 x In
.2 TM32D : 12,5 x In .2
TM40G : TM63G :
.1 2 x In .1 2 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir

TM magnetic trip units (cont.)
TM80D / TM100D TM125D / TM160D
E28457
10 000 10 000
E28456
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5 TM125D
t(s) t(s) 10 x In
2 2
NS160/250
1 Im = 12,5 x In 1
.5 .5 TM160D
NS100 8 x In
.2 Im = 8 x In
.2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 reflex tripping: .01 reflex tripping :
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
TM200D / TM250D
E28458
10 000
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
Im = 5 … 10 x In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01 reflex tripping :
t < 10 ms
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir

Protection of distribution systems (cont.)
STR22SE and STR22GE electronic trip units

STR22SE - 40…100 A STR22SE - 160…250 A
E28459
E28460
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Im = 2…10 x Ir Im = 2…10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping reflex tripping
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 I = 11 x In .002 I = 11 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
STR22GE - 40…100 A STR22GE - 160…250 A

E28410
10 000
E28409
10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
Ir = 0.4…1 x In
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 1
.5 .5
Im = 2…10 x Ir
.2 .2
Im = 2…10 x Ir
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping : reflex tripping :
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 I = 11 x In .002 I = 11 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir

Motor-starter protection
MA magnetic trip units

MA2,5…MA100 MA150 and MA220
E30212
10 000 10 000
E28467
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500 thermal withstand
MA220
200 200
MA150
100 thermal withstand 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Im = 6 …14 x In Im = 9 …14 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / In
STR22ME electronic trip units

STR22ME - 10…220 A
E28370
10 000
5 000
2 000 Ir
1 000
500
200
100
50
20 class 10 (IEC 60947-4)
10
5
t(s)
2
1
.5
Im = 13 x Ir
.2
.1
.05
.02
reflex tripping :
.01 t < 10 ms
.005
.002 I = 15 x In
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir

Protection of distribution systems
STR23 and STR53 electronic trip units

STR23SE / STR23SV STR53UE / STR53SV
10 000
E28461
10 000
E94513
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50 tr = 0.5…16 s
20 20
Ii = 1.5…11 x In
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s) Isd = 1.5…10 x Ir
2 2
l 2 t OFF
Isd = 2…10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
0.3
.2 .2
0.2
.1 .1 l 2 t OFF 0.1
.05 .05
0
.02 .02
reflex tripping
.01 t < 10 ms
.01
.005 .005 reflex tripping :
t < 10 ms
.002 I = 11 x In .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50
I / Ir I / Ir I / In
Options for STR53UE

Earth-fault protection
E28371
10 000
5 000
2 000
Ig = 0.2…1 x In
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
I2t ON
5
t(s)
2
1
.5 0.4
0.3
.2 0.2
.1 I2t OFF 0.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30
I / In

Motor-starter protection
MA magnetic and STR43ME electronic trip units

MA320…MA500 STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 A
E28468
E28369
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 thermal withstand 100
50 50
class 10 A
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2 hot tripping curve
1 1 cold tripping curve
.5 .5
Isd = 6…13 x Ir
.2 .2
Im = 9 ... 14 x In
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping
.01 reflex tripping : .01 t < 10 ms
t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002 Ii = 10,4 x In

.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / In I / Ir
STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 20

E38879
10 000
E38946
10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
class 20
50 class 10 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 hot tripping curve 2 hot tripping curve
1 cold tripping curve 1 cold tripping curve
.5 .5
Isd = 6…13 x Ir Isd = 6…13 x Ir
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping reflex tripping
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
Ii = 10,4 x In Ii = 10,4 x In
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Thermal-withstand capacities are given for circuit
breakers operating in an ambient temperature of 65 °C.

Micrologic electronic control units

Micrologic 2.0 Micrologic 5.0, 6.0, 7.0 - Micrologic 5.0A, 6.0A, 7.0A
10 000
E46276
E46350
10 000
5 000 Ir = 0,4…1 x In 5 000 Ir = 0,4…1 x In
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 tr = 0,5...24 s 100 tr = 0,5…24 s
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s) Isd = 1,5…10 x Ir
2 2
Isd = 1,5…10 x Ir
1 1
I2t ON
.5 .5 0,4 0,4
0,3 0,3
.2 .2 0,2 0,2
0,1 2 0,1
.1 .1 I t OFF
0 0
.05 .05
Ii = 2…15 x In . OFF
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 3 5 7 10 20 30
I / Ir x Ir x In
Options for Micrologic electronic control units

Earth-fault protection (Micrologic 6.0)
E46266
10 000
5 000
2 000
Ig = A…J x In (1)
1 000 1200 A max.
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s) I2t ON
2
1
.5 0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
.1 I2t OFF
0 0
.05
.02
.01
.005
(1)
.002 Ig = In x… A B C D E F G H J
.001 Ig < 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
.05.07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 200 300 400 A y Ig y 1200 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
I / In Ig > 1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200

Reflex tripping
E28463
Compact NS100 to 630 devices TM160D...TM250D
STR22SE250
incorporate the exclusive reflex-tripping
20
system.
This system breaks very high fault currents NS630
by mechanically tripping the device via a

STR22SE160
"piston" actuated directly by the pressure
NS400
produced in the breaking units resulting NS250
from a short-circuit. 10
TM160D
For high short-circuits, this system provides

8
a faster break and a trip guarantee, as well t TM16D...TM100D
(ms) 7
as natural total discrimination. STR22SE40... 100
Reflex-tripping curves are exclusively a 6
function of the circuit-breaker rating. 5

NS100-NS160
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200
kA rms

Additional characteristics Current-limiting curves
The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is Ics = 100 % Icu

its aptitude to limit short-circuit currents. The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range greatly reduces the
forces created by fault currents in devices.
The result is a major increase in breaking performance. In particular, the service
E28800
Isc breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100% of Icu.

prospective The Ics value, defined by IEC standard 60947-2, is guaranteed by tests comprising
Isc peak the following operations:
prospective b break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100 % of Icu
current
b check that the device continues to function normally:
v it conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise
prospective
Isc v protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standard
v suitability for isolation is not impaired.
limited Isc
peak
actual Longer service life of electrical installations
current Current-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuits
limited
Isc on installations.
Thermal effects
tc t
Less temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables.
The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range is Mechanical effects
due to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid natural Reduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or bus
repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc voltages bars being deformed or broken.
in-series with a very steep wave front).
Electromagnetic effects
Less disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits.
Economy by means of cascading

Cascading is a technique directly derived from current limiting. Circuit breakers with
breaking capacities less than the prospective short-circuit current may be installed
downstream of a limiting circuit breaker. The breaking capacity is reinforced by the
limiting capacity of the upstream device.
It follows that substantial savings can be made on downstream equipment and
enclosures.
Current-limiting curves
The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which
are a function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow
if no protection devices were installed):
b the actual peak current (limited current),
b thermal stress (A2s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor
with a resistance of 1 Ω.
Example
What is the real value of a 150 kA rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 kA peak)
limited by an NS250L upstream ?
Answer: 30 kA peak (see next page).
Maximum permissible cable stresses

The table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cables
depending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area
(CSA). CSA values are given in mm2 and thermal stresses in A2s.
CSA (mm2) 1.5 2.5 4 6 10
PVC Cu 2.97 x 104 8.26 x 104 2.12 x 105 4.76 x 105 1.32 x 106
Al 5.41 x 105
PRC Cu 4.10 x 104 1.39 x 105 2.92 x 105 6.56 x 105 1.82 x 106
Al 7.52 x 105
CSA (mm2) 16 25 35 50
PVC Cu 3.4 x 106 8.26 x 106 1.62 x 107 3.31 x 107
Al 1.39 x 106 3.38 x 106 6.64 x 106 1.35 x 107
PRC Cu 4.69 x 106 1.39 x 107 2.23 x 107 4.56 x 107
Al 1.93 x 106 4.70 x 106 9.23 x 106 1.88 x 107
Example
Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm2 adequately protected by an NS160N?
The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.32x106 A2s.
All short-circuit currents at the point where an NS160N (Icu = 35 kA) is installed are
limited with a thermal stress less than 6 x 105 A2s (see next page).
Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the
circuit breaker.

Current-limiting curves
Voltage 380/415 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC
300 300
E90272
E58557
NS630bH
NS800H NS1600bN
200 NS630bN NS1000H 200 NS2000N
NS1250H NS2500N
NS800N
NS1000N NS1600H 146 NS3200N
NS1250N
NS630bN
100 NS1600N NS630bL 100 NS800N NS630bH
NS800L 80 NS1000N
80 NS1000L
NS800H
70 70 NS1250N NS1000H
60 60 NS1600N NS1250H
50 NS630 50 NS630bL NS1600H
H NS800L
NS400 L
kA peak40 N kA peak 40 NS1000L NS630 NS400
L TC150/250/400
H
30 NS250 30
H NS160
NS100
N NS100
20 TM32...250 20 N L
NS250 TM40…100
TM25 TM 25
N NH NS160
TM16
E N TM 16
10 10
8 NSA160 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300
65
kA rms kA rms
Thermal-stress curves
Voltage 380/415 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC
9 9
10 10
E90271
E58556
5 5
3 NS630bH 3 NS1600bN
NS800H NS2000N
2 NS630bN NS1000H
2
NS2500N
NS800N NS1250H 1,41
8 NS3200N
10 NS1000N NS1600H 8
NS1250N 10
NS1600N NS630bN NS630bH
5 5 NS800N NS800H
NS1000N NS1000H
3 3 NS1250N NS1250H
2 2 NS1600N NS1600H
7 7
10 NS1000L
10 NS630bL
NS800L
2 NS630bL 2 NS1000L
As 5 L NS800L As 5 H NS630
H L L NS400
N NS630
3 L 3 H
TC150/250/400
H N
2 N NS400 2
N L
6 6
10 H L 10 H
NS250
NS100
NS250
NS160 N TM 40…100
NS160
5 NS100 5
N TM32…250
3 E N 3 TM 25
NSA160 TM25
2 2 TM 16
5 5
10 TM16 10
5 5
3 3
2 2
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 150 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 150 200 300
65
kA rms kA rms

Schneider Electric 550E5100.fm/17
Compact NS Complementary technical information
Cascading 2
Cascading, network 220/240 V 4
Cascading, network 380/415 V 7
Cascading, network 440 V 10
Motor protection cascading 12
Cascading for installations with several
transformers in parallel 14
Protections discrimination 15
Motor protection discrimination 97
Cascading and enhanced discrimination 106
Protection of motor circuits 117
Circuit breaker/contactor coordination 117, 125
Using the circuit breaker/contactor coordination tables 122
Type coordination 2 127
Type coordination 1 148
Use of LV switches 152
Switch-disconnectors protection 156
Protection of LV/LV transformers 164
Coordination tables between Merlin/Gerin with
the circuit breaker and Telemecanique Canalis
electrical busbar trunking 167
Cascading and reinforced discrimination 182
Complementary Cascading
technical information
Summary
Application Network Upstream device Downstream device Tableau page
Distribution cascading 220/240 V Compact NS Compact and Multi 9 4
Compact NS and Masterpact Compact and Multi 9 6
380/415 V Compact NS Compact and Multi 9 7
Compact NS and Masterpact Compact and Multi 9 9
440 V Compact NS Compact and Multi 9 10
Compact NS and Masterpact Compact NS 11
Motor protection cascading 220/240 V Compact NS Compact NS, Integral, GVM 12
380/415 V Compact NS Compact NS, Integral, GVM 12
440 V Compact NS Compact NS, Integral 13
Cascading for installations with 2
or 3 transformers in parallel 14
What is cascading?
Cascading is the use of the current limiting capacity of circuit breakers at a given
point to permit installation of lower-rated and therefore lower-cost circuit breakers
downstream.
The upstream Compact circuit breakers acts as a barrier against short-circuit
currents. In this way, downstream circuit breakers with lower breaking capacities
than the prospective short-circuit (at their point of installation) operate under their
normal breaking conditions.
Since the current is limited throughout the circuit controlled by the limiting circuit
breaker, cascading applies to all switchgear downstream. It is not restricted to two
consecutive devices.
General use of cascading

With cascading, the devices can be installed in different switchboards. Thus, in
general, cascading refers to any combination of circuit breakers where a circuit
breaker with a breaking capacity less than the prospective Isc at its point of
installation can be used. Of course, the breaking capacity of the upstream circuit
breaker must be greater than or equal to the prospective short-circuit current at its
point of installation.
The combination of two circuit breakers in cascading configuration is covered by
the following standards:
b IEC 60947-2 (construction)
b NF C 15-100, § 434.3.1 (installation).
Coordination between circuit breakers

The use of a protective device possessing a breaking capacity less than the
prospective short-circuit current at its installation point is permitted as long as
another device is installed upstream with at least the necessary breaking capacity.
In this case, the characteristics of the two devices must be coordinated in such a
way that the energy let through by the upstream device is not more than that which
can be withstood by the downstream device and the cables protected by these
devices without damage.
Cascading can only be checked by laboratory tests and the possible combinations
can be specified only by the circuit breaker manufacturer.
Cascading and protection discrimination

In cascading configurations, due to the Roto-active breaking technique,
discrimination is maintained and , in some cases, even enhanced. Consult the
enhanced discrimination tables on pages 82 to 90 for data on discrimination limits
Cascading tables
Merlin Gerin cascading tables are:
b drawn up on the basis of calculations (comparison between the energy limited
by the upstream device and the maximum permissible thermal stress for the
downstream device)
b verified experimentally in accordance with IEC standard 60947-2.
For distribution systems with 220/240 V, 400/415 V and 440 V between phases,
the tables of the following pages indicate cascading possibilities between upstream
Compact and downstream Multi 9 and Compact circuit breakers as well as
between upstream Masterpact and downstream Compact circuit breakers.
Complementary Cascading
technical information
220/240 V network downstream from

E45057
N
a 380/415 V network
For 1P + N or 2P circuit breakers connected between the phase and neutral on a
380/415 V network, with a TT or TNS neutral system, consult the 220/240 V
cascading table to determinate cascading possibilities between upstream and
downstream circuit breakers.
E88004
N
1
2
3
E88005
For 1P circuit breakers connected to one phase of a 380/415 V network used

together with the neutral to supply a single-phase circuit, consult the cascading
tables for 380/415 V networks to determine the cascading possibilities between
upstream and downstream circuit breakers.
Example of three level cascading

E45030
A
Isc = 80 kA
Consider three circuit breakers A, B and C connected in series. The criteria for
NS250L
220 A
cascading are fulfilled in the following two cases:
b the upstream device A is coordinated for cascading with both devices B and C
(even if the cascading criteria are not fulfilled between B and C). It is simply
B necessary to check that the combinations A + B and A + C have the required
Isc = 50 kA breaking capacity
NS100N b each pair of successive devices is coordinated, i.e. A with B and B with C (even
63 A if the cascading criteria are not fulfilled between A and C). It is simply necessary to
check that the combinations A + B and B + C have the required breaking capacity.
C The upstream breaker A is a NS250L (breaking capacity 150 kA) for a prospective
Isc = 24 kA
lsc of 80 kA across its output terminals.
C60N A NS100N (breaking capacity 25 kA) can be used for circuit breaker B for a
25 A prospective lsc of 50 kA across its output terminals, since the "reinforced" breaking
capacity provided by cascading with the upstream NS250L is 150 kA.
A C60N (breaking capacity 10 kA) can be used for circuit breaker C for a
prospective lsc of 24 kA across its output terminals since the "reinforced" breaking
capacity provided by cascading with the upstream NS250L is 30 kA.
Note that the "reinforced" breaking capacity of the C60N with the NS100N
upstream is only 25 kA, but:
b A + B = 150 kA
b A + C = 30 kA.
Complementary Cascading, network 220/240 V
technical information Upstream: Compact NS
Downstream: Compact and Multi 9
Upstream NSC100N NSA160N NS100N NS100H NS100L NS160NE NS160N NS160H NS160L
Breaking capacity kA rms 42 50 85 100 150 85 85 100 150
Downstream Breaking capacity (kA rms)
C32 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
C32 42 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
DPN/DPNN 15 15 15 15 15
C60a 30 30 30 80 80 30 30 40 40
C60N 40 40 40 100 100 40 40 60 60
C60H 42 50 50 100 100 50 50 80 80
C60L y 25 A 65 100 100 65 65 80 80
C60L y 40 A 42 50 65 100 100 65 65 80 80
C60L y 63 A 42 50 65 100 100 65 65 80 80
XC/SC40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
PM25 u 14 A 85 100 100 85 85 100 100
NC100H/NC125H 42 50 65 100 100 65 65 100 100
NC100L 65 70 100 65 65 70 100
NC100LS 85 100 150 85 85 100 150
NC100LH/LMA 150 150
C120N 42 40 40 50 70 40 40 50 70
C120H 42 40 40 50 70 40 40 50 70
NG125a 40 40 40 50 70 40 40 50 70
NG125N 60 70 85 60 60 70 85
NG125H 85 85 100 85 85 85 100
NG125L/LMA 150 150
NSA160N 85 85 100 100
NS80HMA 150 150
NSC100N 50 85 100 100 85 85 100 100
NS100N 100 150 100 150
NS100H 150 150
NS160NE 100 150
NS160N 100 150
NS160H 150
Upstream NS250N NS250H NS250L NS400N NS400H NS400L NS630N NS630H NS630L
Downstream Breaking capacity (kA rm
C32 40 40 40
C32 42 50 50
C60a 30 40 40
C60N 40 60 60
C60H 50 65 65
C60L y 25 A 65 80 80
C60L y 40 A 65 80 80
C60L y 63 A 50 65 65
XC/SC40 40 40 40
PM25 u 14 A
NC100H/NC125H 65 100 100
NC100L 65 70 100
NC100LS 85 100 150
NC100LH/LMA 150
C120N/H 40 50 70
NG125a 40 50 70
NG125N 60 70 85
NG125H 85 85 100
NG125L/LMA 150
NSA160N 85 100 100 85 100 100 85 100 100
NS80HMA 150 150 150
NSC100N 85 100 100 85 100 100 85 100 100
NS100N 100 150 100 150 100 150
NS100H 150 150 150
NS160NE 100 150 100 150 100 150
NS160N 100 150 100 150 100 150
NS160H 150 150 150
NS250N 100 150 100 150 100 150
NS250H 150 150 150
NS400N 100 150 100 150
NS400H 150 150
NS630N 100 150
NS630H 150
Complementary Cascading, network 220/240 V
technical information Upstream: Compact NS
Downstream: Compact and Multi 9
Upstream NSC100N NSA160N NS100N NS100H NS100L NS160NE NS160N NS160H NS160L
NS125E 50 50 50 60 60
NSA160E 50 50 50 60 60
NB50N 20 20 20 30 30 20 20 30 30
NB100F 20 20 20 30 30 20 20 30 30
NB100N 30 30 30 40 40 30 30 40 40
Upstream NS250N NS250H NS250L NS400N NS400H NS400L NS630N NS630H NS630L
NS125E 50 60 60 50 60 60 50 60 60
NSA160E 50 60 60 50 60 60 50 60 60
NB50N 20 30 30
NB100F 20 30 30
NB100N 30 40 40
NB225N 50 60 60 50 60 60 50 60 60
NB400N 50 60 60 50 60 60
NB600N 50 60 60
Catalogue numbers NSA125/160: complete fixed/FC
device
NSA160N/E and NSA125/160NA
Compact NSA160N with built-in trip unit

Compact NSA160N (36 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
E21016
TM16D 28239 28259

TM25D 28238 28258
TM32D 28237 28257
TM40D 28236 28256
TM50D 28235 28255
TM63D 28234 28254
TM80D 28233 28253
TM100D 28232 28252
TM125D 28231 28251
TM160D 28230 28250
Compact NSA160E with built-in trip unit
Compact NSA160E (16 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
E21016
TM16D 28209 28229

TM25D 28208 28228
TM32D 28207 28227
TM40D 28206 28226
TM50D 28205 28225
TM63D 28204 28224
TM80D 28203 28223
TM100D 28202 28222
TM125D 28201 28221
TM160D 28200 28220
Compact NSA125/160NA switch
Rating 3P 4P
Compact NSA125NA 28263 28264
Compact NSA160NA 28261 28262
550E5060.fm/78 Schneider Electric

Catalogue numbers Accessories
NSA160N/E and NSA125/160NA
Vigi module 0.03/3A

Bottom connectors 3P 28000
4P 28001
E20793
R
T Top connectors 3P 28002
4P 28003
Long terminal shields (1 pair)
3P 28034
4P 28035
E18607
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
OF or SD 29450
OF or SD low level 29452
E18608
Voltage releases
AC 50/60 Hz Voltage (V) MX MN
48 28070 28080
E21394
110/130 28071 28081

220/240 28072 28082
380/415 28073 28083
440/480 28074 28084
DC Voltage (V) MX MN
24 28075 28085
48 28076 28086
125 28077 28087
250 28078 28088
Rotary handles
Door-mounted rotary control
Extended black handle 28059
Red handle on yellow front 28058
E31293
ON
I
d
trippe ∅5...8
reset
O
OFF
Miscellaneous
DIN rail and riser for Multi 9 devices 28041

Catalogue numbers Source changeover
Compact NS100 to NS630 and
Compact C801 to C1251
Manual source changeover

Mechanical interlocking
For toggle controlled circuit-breakers NS100...250 29354
NS400...630 32614
E21288
For rotary handled circuit-breakers NS100...250 29369

NS400...630 32621
E18780
C801...1251 46946
Key lock interlocking
For rotary handled or remote controlled circuit breakers
2 locks, 1 key Ronis 1351.500 41950
E23851
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878
Remote controlled source changeover

Plate + IVE
Source "normal"/source "replacement" (identical voltages) 24 to 250 V DC 48 to 415 V AC 50/60 Hz
480 V 60 Hz
E33419
NS100...250/NS100...250
Plate + IVE (1) 29351 29350
Plate 29349 29349
IVE 29356 29352
Auxiliary switches 2 OF + 2 SDE 4 x 29450 4 x 29450
Spare wiring system (device/IVE) 29365 29365
Back sockets option add: Only long RC (2) (2)
Plug in base option add: Plug in kit (2) (2)
NS400...630/NS100...630
Plate + IVE (1) 32611 32610
Plate 32609 32609
IVE 29356 29352
Auxiliary switches 2 OF + 2 SDE 4 x 29450 4 x 29450
Spare wiring system (device/IVE) 29365 29365
Back sockets option add: Only long RC (2) (2)
Plug in base option add: Plug in kit (2) (2)
Adaptator kit for NS100...250 1 x 32618 1 x 32618
C801...1251/C801...1251
Plate + IVE (1) 46955 46954
Plate 46949 46949
IVE 46956 46957
Auxiliary switches 3 OF + 1 SD 2 x 44901 2 x 44901
Contact SDE for Compact with T remote control 2 x 46962 2 x 46962
Motormech. For ats spare wiring (device/IVE) 46873 46873
Back sockets option (2) (2)
Control unit option
110/127 V AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V AC 50/60 Hz 380/415 V AC 50/60 Hz
480 V 60 Hz
E33420
MERLIN
9
GERIN
0 . OFF
multi
P25M
ACP + control unit BA (1) 29470 29471

660V
0 . OFF
AC3-IEC292-1
GERIN
MERLIN
9
multi
P25M
660V
AC3-IEC292-1
Test
Test
Plate ACP 29363 29364

Control unit BA 29376 29377
ACP + control unit UA (1) 29448 29472 29473
Plate ACP 29447 29363 29364
Control unit UA 29446 29378 29380
ACP + control unit UA150 (1) (communication option) 29474 29475
Plate ACP 29363 29364
Control unit UA150 29379 29381
Wiring cable between BA/UA and ACP/IVE
29368 29368
(1) the supply voltages BA/UA control unit, ACP plate, IVE and the remote control must be identical whatever the source
changeover type.
(2) see products pages.
Downstream coupling accessories
Source "normal"/source "replacement"
NS100...250/NS100...250 250 A 3P 29358
E23851
4P 29359
NS400...630/NS400...630 630 A 3P 32619
4P 32620

Catalogue numbers Source changeover (cont.)
Compact NS100 to NS630 and
Compact C801 to C1251 (cont.)
Typical composition of remote controlled source changeover

Remote controlled source changeover
1 normal device N (1)
+ 1 replacement device R (2)
E33422
+ 2 remote controls (3)

+ 1 plate with interlocking (4) with IVE (5) and its wiring (8)
+ 2 plug-in kits (if plug-in version)
+ 1 adaptor kit for NS100...250 plug-in (if NS400...630 with NS100...250)
+ auxilary switches (6)
2 x (1 OF + 1 SDE) for Compact NS100...630
2 x (3 OF + 1 SD) for Compact C801...1251
+ 1 downstream coupling accessory (7) for Compact NS100...630 (option)
+ long RC (if back connection)
IVE voltages and remote controls are identical.

Associated control unit
1 source changeover without associated control unit
+ 1 ACP (9) with BA control unit (10)
E33423
MERLIN
9
GERIN
0 . OFF
multi
P25M
660V
0 . OFF
AC3-IEC292-1
GERIN
MERLIN
9
multi
P25M
660V
AC3-IEC292-1
Or + 1 ACP (9) with UA control unit (11)

Test
Test
Or + 1 ACP (9) with UA150 control unit (11)
IVE voltages + remote control + ACP + BA or UA are identical.

Catalogue numbers NS125E
Complete fixed/FC device and
accessories
Complete device
Compact NS125E with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NS125E (16 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d
E21284
TM16D 34636 34646 34656

TM25D 34635 34645 34655
TM40D 34634 34644 34654
.85
Ir
.9
.95
push
to
trip
2
4
Im
5
10
6
8
Ir Im
TM63D 34633 34643 34653
1.5
.8 xIr
.98
TM80D 34632 34642 34652

.7
1
.63
xIn
TM100D 34631 34641 34651

TM125D 34630 34640 34650
Vigicompact NS125E MH with trip unit TM-D
Vigicompact NS125E (16 kA at 380/415 V)
Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d
E21279
TM16D 34676 34686 34696

TM25D 34675 34685 34695
TM40D 34674 34684 34694
TM63D 34673 34683 34693
push
to
trip
TM80D 34672 34682 34692

TM100D 34671 34681 34691
TM125D 34670 34680 34690

RC device = FC device + RC kit
Short RC kit
3P 29237
E16992
4P 29238
Comprising: Kit 3P 6 short RCs 3x 29235
Kit 4P 8 short RCs 4x 29235
Mixed RC kit
3P 29239
4P 29240
Comprising: Kit 3P 4 short RCs 2x 29235
2 long RCs 1x 29236
Kit 4P 4 short RCs 2x 29235
4 long RCs 2x 29236
Accessories
Rear connections
2 short 29235
2 long 29236
E18579
Bare cable connectors

Snap-on, for cable Set of 3 29242
1.5 to 95 mm2 Set of 4 29243
E18572
Clips for bare-cable connector Set of 10 29241

Distribution connectors for six Set of 3 29248
1.5 to 35 mm2 cables with Set of 4 29249
E18589
interphase barriers
Terminal extensions
Right-angle terminal extensions Set of 3 29261
Set of 4 29262
E18600
Straight terminal extensions Set of 3 29263

Set of 4 29264
E18601
Spreaders 3P 31563
4P 31564
E186599
Supplied with 2 (or 3) interphase barriers

Catalogue numbers NS125E (cont.)
Accessories
Connection accessories (cont.)

Crimp lugs
For cable 120 mm2 Set of 3 29252
Set of 4 29256
E18602

Set of 4 29257
Set of 4 29258
Supplied with 2 (or 3) interphase barriers
Terminal shields
Short (1 pair) 3P 29321
4P 29322
E18618
Long (1 pair) 3P 29323

4P 29324
Interphase barriers Set of 6 29329

E18606
Electrical auxiliaries - test kits

Auxiliary contacts (changeovers)
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
SDE adapter for trip unit TM 29451
E18608
Voltage releases
AC 50/60 Hz Voltage (V) MX MN
48 29385 29405
E18609
110/130 29386 29406

208/277 29387 29407
380/480 29388 29408
525/600 29389 29409
DC Voltage (V) MX MN
12 29382 29402
24 29390 29410
30 29391 29411
48 29392 29412
60 29383 29403
125 29393 29413
250 29394 29414
MN 220/240 V AC with time delay 29422
Composed of: MN 250 V DC 29414
Delay unit 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
Rotary handles
Standard black handle 29337
E18611
ON
I
MCC conversion accessory 29341

O
OFF CNOMO conversion accessory 29342
Standard extended rotary handle 29338
ON
I

E18612
O
OFF ON
I
OFF
Accessories
Locking devices 29344
Key locks Ronis 1351.500 41940
E18620
ON
I
pr
of
al
ux
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
O
OFF Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact 29345
2 early-make contacts 29346
Locks
Toggle locking device for 3 padlocks
Removable 29370
Fixed 29371

Catalogue numbers NS100/400 with "tarif jaune"
connection
Complete fixed/FC device without accessories

Compact NS with trip unit STRAB
Compact NS
Rating 4P
E22078
NS100N STRAB 100 34562

NS160N STRAB 160 34563
Ir
.9
4
Im
push
5
to
trip
6
90 %Ir
105
alarm
STR
22 DE
50/60H
z test
NS250N STRAB 240 34564
3
.85 .95 8 Ir Im
.8 2
NS400N STRAB 400 34565

.98 10
1.5
.7 xIr
1
.63
xIn
Comprising: Basic frame Trip unit

NS100N + STRAB100 29008 34550
NS160N + STRAB160 30408 34551
NS250N + STRAB240 31408 34554
NS400N + STRAB400 32408 34557
Vigicompact NS with trip unit STRAB
Vigicompact NS
Rating 4P
E22087
NS100N STRAB 100 34572

NS160N STRAB 160 34573
push
to
trip
NS250N STRAB 240 34574
NS400N STRAB 400 34575
Comprising: Basic frame Trip unit Vigi module MH/MB

NS100N + STRAB100 + MH 29008 34550 29211
NS160N + STRAB160 + MH 30408 34551 29211
NS250N + STRAB240 + MH 31408 34554 31536
NS400N + STRAB400 + MB 32408 34557 32456

Catalogue numbers NS100/400 "tarif jaune"
connection (cont.)
Complet fixed/FC device without accessories

Compact NS with normal trip unit
Compact NS100N
Rating 4P 3d 4P 4d 4P 3d+N/Z
E22086
TM40D 29643 29653

TM63D 29642 29652
push
to
trip
90 %Ir
105 Im
STR
22 DE
50/60H
z test
TM80D 29641 29651 29661
5
Im 4 6
5 alarm
3 Ir Im
TM100D 29640 29650 29660

Ir Ir 4 6 8
.9 .9
.85 3 2
.85 .95 .95 8
10
Ir Im
1.5
.8 xIr
.8 .982
.98 10
.7
1 1.5
.7 .63
xIr
1
.63 xIn
xIn
Compact NS160N
TM80D 30643 30653 30663
TM100D 30642 30652 30662
TM125D 30641 30651 30661
TM160D 30640 30650 30660
Compact NS250N
TM125D 31643 31653 31663
TM160D 31642 31652 31662
TM200D 31641 31651 31661
TM250D 31640 31650 31660
Compact NS400N
4P 3d 4P 4d 4P 3d+N/Z
STR23SE 32694 32694 32694
Vigicompact NS with normal trip unit
Compact NS100N
E22087
TM40D 29943 29953

TM63D 29942 29952
push
to
trip
TM80D 29941 29951 29961
TM100D 29940 29950 29960
Compact NS160N
TM80D 30943 30953 30963
TM100D 30942 30952 30962
TM125D 30941 30951 30961
TM160D 30940 30950 30960
Compact NS250N
TM125D 31943 31953 31963
TM160D 31942 31952 31962
TM200D 31941 31951 31961
TM250D 31940 31950 31960
Compact NS400N
4P 3d 4P 4d 4P 3d+N/Z
STR23SE 32734 32734 32734

connection (cont.)
Interpact INV100 to INV630 standard version

4P
Interpact INV100 For Compact NS100 31161
E51001

4P
E51002
Spare viewport
For INV100 to 250 31089
For INV320/400 31090
E51003
Combination with Compact NS devices

INV100 to 250 - NS250 combination assembly 31066
INV320/400 - NS250 combination assembly 31067
E51004
Front alignment base for INV320/400 - NS250 combination assembly 31064

INV320/400 - NS400 combination assembly 31068
Flexible connection assembly, vertical INV100 to 250 to horizontal NS250 31069

Flexible connection assembly, vertical INV320/400 to horizontal NS250 31092
E51005
Flexible connection assembly, vertical INV100 to 250 to vertical NS250, side-by-side 31071
Flexible connection assembly, vertical INV320/400 to vertical NS400, side-by-side 31072
Flexible connection assembly, vertical INV320/400 to vertical NS250, side-by-side 31093

connection (cont.)
Installation and connection with or without the visible break function

Conventional installation
Combination assembly
Upstream and downstream connection
INV100 to 250 - 4 snap-on bare cable 1.5 to 95 mm2 ; y 160 A 2x 29243
NS100/160/250 connectors for cables: 10 to 185 mm2 ; y 250 A 2x 29260
10 clips for bare cable connector 1x 29241
4 right-angle terminal extensions 2x 29262
2 long terminal shields 1x 29324
INV320/400 - NS100/160/250 4 bare cable connectors : For 1 cable, 35 mm2 1x 32480
to 300 mm2
For 2 cables, 35 mm2 1x 32482
to 240 mm2
4 snap-on bare cable 1.5 to 95 mm2 ; y 160 A 1x 29243
connectors for cables: 10 to 185 mm2 ; y 250 A 1x 29260
10 clips for bare cable connector 1x 29241
INV320/400 - NS400 4 bare cable connectors : For 1 cable, 35 mm2 2x 32480
to 300 mm2
to 240 mm2
Installation in cabinet or enclosure
Combination assembly (mounting in duct)
Flexible connection assembly (mounting in cubicle)
Upstream and downstream connection
INV100 to 250 - 4 snap-on bare cable 1.5 to 95 mm2 ; y 160 A 2x 29243
NS100/160/250 connectors for cables: 10 to 185 mm2 ; y 250 A 2x 29260
2 short terminal shields 1x 29322
INV320/400 - NS100/160/250 4 bare cable connectors : For 1 cable, 35 mm2 1x 32480
to 300 mm2
to 240 mm2
4 snap-on bare cable 1.5 to 95 mm2 ; y 160 A 1x 29243
connectors for cables: 10 to 185 mm2 ; y 250 A 1x 29260
INV320/400 - NS400 4 bare cable connectors : For 1 cable, 35 mm2 2x 32480
to 300 mm2
to 240 mm2

Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 fixed
manually operated
Complete device
Front-connected circuit breaker with Micrologic 2.0 control unit

Compact NS type N
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
E59545
NS630b 33460 33463

NS800 33466 33469
NS1000 33472 33475
NS1250 33478 33480
NS1600 33482 33484
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33461 33464
NS800 33467 33470
NS1000 33473 33476
NS1250 33479 33481
NS1600 33483 33485
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33462 33465
NS800 33468 33471
NS1000 33474 33477
Front-connected circuit breaker with Micrologic 5.0 control unit
Compact NS type N
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
E59545
NS630b 33546 33549

NS800 33552 33555
NS1000 33558 33561
NS1250 33564 33566
NS1600 33568 33570
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33547 33550
NS800 33553 33556
NS1000 33559 33562
NS1250 33565 33567
NS1600 33569 33571
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33548 33551
NS800 33554 33557
NS1000 33560 33563
Front-connected switch-disconnector
3P 4P
NS630b 33486 33491
E59546
NS800 33487 33492

NS1000 33488 33493
NS1250 33489 33494
NS1600 33490 33495
Nota : select in addition the connection accessories, device accessories and auxiliaries, control-unit accessories and communications option, as required.

manually operated (cont.)
Complete device (cont.)
Front-connected circuit breaker with Micrologic 2.0 A control unit

Compact NS type N
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
E47313
NS630b 33223 33227

NS800 33233 33237
NS1000 33243 33247
NS1250 33253 33257
NS1600 33263 33267
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33228 33229
NS800 33238 33239
NS1000 33248 33249
NS1250 33258 33259
NS1600 33268 33269
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33497 33500
NS800 33498 33501
NS1000 33499 33502
Front-connected circuit breaker with Micrologic 5.0 A control unit
Compact NS type N
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
E47313
NS630b 33323 33327

NS800 33333 33337
NS1000 33343 33347
NS1250 33353 33357
NS1600 33363 33367
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33328 33329
NS800 33338 33339
NS1000 33348 33349
NS1250 33358 33359
NS1600 33368 33369
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33516 33519
NS800 33517 33520
NS1000 33518 33521
Nota : select in addition the connection accessories, device accessories and auxiliaries, control-unit accessories and communications option, as required.

manually operated (cont.)
Device based on separate
components
Basic circuit breaker
Compact NS type N
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
E59547
NS630b 33220 33224

NS800 33230 33234
NS1000 33240 33244
NS1250 33250 33254
NS1600 33260 33264
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33221 33225
NS800 33231 33235
NS1000 33241 33245
NS1250 33251 33255
NS1600 33261 33265
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33222 33226
NS800 33232 33236
NS1000 33242 33246
+ Micrologic control units
Without ammeter With ammeter
(option A)
Basic protection 2.0 33504 33505
Selective protection 5.0 33511 33512
Selective + earth-fault protection 6.0 33513
Selective + earth-leakage protection 7.0 33514
Basic switch-disconnector
Compact NS type NA
3P 4P
E59548
NS630b 33420 33421

NS800 33422 33423
NS1000 33424 33425
NS1250 33426 33427
NS1600 33428 33429
Connections for circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors

Front connection
3P 4P
E59549
630/1000 A Top 33598 33608

Bottom 33599 33609
1250 A Top 33600 33610
630/1000 A type L Bottom 33601 33611
1600 A Top 33602 33612
Bottom 33603 33613
Rear connection
3P 4P
Vertical Top 33604 33614
Bottom 33605 33615
Horizontal Top 33606 33616
Bottom 33607 33617
Note: to order a complete device, order:
b a basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector
b connections
b accessories (for the device, the connection, the control unit) and communication option as required.

electrically operated
components
Compact NS type N
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
E59550
NS630b 33270 33274

NS800 33280 33284
U? NS1000 33290 33294
O
push
OFF
I
push
ON
NS1250 33300 33304
O OFF
discharg
ed
NS1600 33310 33314

Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33271 33275
NS800 33281 33285
NS1000 33291 33295
NS1250 33301 33305
NS1600 33311 33315
Note: the characteristics of the motor Compact NS type L
mechanism module for electrical operation are Icu = 150 kA at 220/415V 3P 4P
specified separately by selecting a part number
from the table at the bottom of this page. NS630b 33272 33276
NS800 33282 33286
NS1000 33292 33296
(option A)
Compact NS type NA
3P 4P
E59551
NS630b 33440 33441

NS800 33442 33443
U? NS1000 33444 33445
O OFF
I
push
ON
NS1250 33446 33447
push
O OFF
discharg
ed
NS1600 33448 33449

Note: the characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified
separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page.
Connections for circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors

Front connection
3P 4P
E59549
630/1000 A Top 33598 33608

Bottom 33599 33609
1250 A Top 33600 33610
630/1000 A type L Bottom 33601 33611
1600 A Top 33602 33612
Bottom 33603 33613
Rear connection
Bottom 33605 33615
Bottom 33607 33617

AC 50/60 Hz DC
Standard Communicating Standard Communicating
48 V 33691 33698 24-30 V 33690 33697
100-130 V 33687 33694 48-60 V 33691 33698
220-240 V 33688 33695 100-130 V 33692 33699
380-415 V 33689 33696 200-250 V 33693 33700
b connections

Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 manually
operated withdrawable devices
components
Compact NS type N
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
E47311
NS630b 33320 33324

NS800 33330 33334
NS1000 33340 33344
NS1250 33350 33354
NS1600 33360 33364
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33321 33325
NS800 33331 33335
NS1000 33341 33345
NS1250 33351 33355
NS1600 33361 33365
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33322 33326
NS800 33332 33336
NS1000 33342 33346
(option A)
Compact NS type NA
3P 4P
E59685
NS630b 33430 33431

NS800 33432 33433
NS1000 33434 33435
NS1250 33436 33437
NS1600 33438 33439
Basic chassis and connections

Chassis
3P 4P
E59652
630/1250 A 33722 33725

1600 A 33723 33726
630/1000 A type L
+ connection
3P 4P
Front connection
Top 33727 33733
E59584
Bottom 33728 33734
Rear connection
E59585
Bottom 33730 33736

Bottom 33732 33738
b chassis and connections

Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 electrically
operated withdrawable devices
components
Compact NS type N
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
E47312
NS630b 33370 33374

NS800 33380 33384
NS1000 33390 33394
U?
NS1250 33400 33404
O
push
OFF
I
push
ON
NS1600 33410 33414
Compact NS type H
d
discharge
O OFF
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33371 33375
NS800 33381 33385
NS1000 33391 33395
NS1250 33401 33405
Note: the characteristics of the motor NS1600 33411 33415
mechanism module for electrical operation are Compact NS type L
specified separately by selecting a part number
from the table at the bottom of this page. Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33372 33376
NS800 33382 33386
NS1000 33392 33396
(option A)
Compact NS type NA
3P 4P
E59686
NS630b 33450 33451

NS800 33452 33453
NS1000 33454 33455
U? NS1250 33456 33457
push
O OFF
I
push
ON
NS1600 33458 33459
O OFF
discharg
ed
Note: the characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified
separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page.
Chassis and connections

Chassis
3P 4P
E59652
630/1250 A 33722 33725

1600 A 33723 33726
630/1000 A type L
+ connection
3P 4P
Front connection
Top 33727 33733
E59584
Bottom 33728 33734

Rear connection
Bottom 33730 33736
E59585

Bottom 33732 33738

AC 50/60 Hz DC
Standard Communicating Standard Communicating
48 V 33831 33838 24-30 V 33830 33837
100-130 V 33827 33834 48-60 V 33831 33838
220-240 V 33828 33835 100-130 V 33832 33839
380-415 V 33829 33836 200-250 V 33833 33840
b a basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector,
b chassis and connections

Catalogue numbers Accessories for NS630b to NS1600
fixed devices
Front connection Rear connection
Bare-cable connectors + 1 connector shield for 4 cables (240 mm2)
3P (3 parts) 33640
4P (4 parts) 33641
E59558
1 long connection shield

3P 33628
4P 33629
E59578
Vertical-connection adapters
3P (3 parts) 33642
4P (4 parts) 33643
E59559
Cable lug adapters

3P (3 parts) 33644
4P (4 parts) 33645
E59560
Interphase barriers
3P/4P top (3 parts) 33646 3P/4P top (3 parts) 33648
3P/4P bottom (3 parts) 33646 3P/4P bottom (3 parts) 33648
E79151
Arc chute screen

3P 33596
4P 33597
E74437
Brackets for mounting on a horizontal surface

3P/4P (2 parts) 33647
Spreaders
3P 33622 3P 33622
4P 33623 4P 33623
E598561
Cable lug kits

240 mm2 3P (6 lug kit) 33013
4P (8 lug kit) 33014
E47820
300 mm2 3P (6 lug kit) 33015

4P (8 lug kit) 33016
Indication contacts
OF, SD, SDE 6 A - 240 V 29450 (1)
Low level 29452 (1)

E59574
Up to 3 OF, 1 SD and 1 SDE can be connected (the SDE contact is standard for electrically operated devices).
Instantaneous voltage releases
MX MN Delay unit for MN
R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable)
E59575
12 V DC 33658
24-30 V AC/DC 33659 33668
48-60 V AC/DC 33660 33669 33680
100-130 V AC/DC 33661 33670 33684 33681
200-250 V AC/DC 33662 33671 33685 33682
240-277 V AC 33663
380-480 V AC 33664 33673 33683
Installation accessories
Escutcheon (small cut-out) for manually operated device with toggle 33717
E59576
Escutcheon for: 33718

- device with toggle (large cutout)
E59582
- device with rotary handle

- electrically operated device
Blanking plate
33858
E59588
(1) See Compact NS.

withdrawable devices
Vertical-connection adapters for front-connected chassis
3P (3 parts) 33642
4P (4 parts) 33643
E59559
Cable lug adapters for front-connected chassis

3P (3 parts) 33644
4P (4 parts) 33645
E59560
Interphase barriers for rear-connected chassis

3P/4P (3 parts) 33768
E59579
Spreaders for front-connected and rear-connected chassis

3P (3 parts) 33622
4P (4 parts) 33623
E598561
Cable lug kits

240 mm2 3P (6 lug kit) 33013
4P (8 lug kit) 33014
E47820
300 mm2 3P (6 lug kit) 33015

4P (8 lug kit) 33016
Chassis accessories
Auxiliary terminal shield (CB)
3P 33763
4P 33764
E59589
Safety shutters (VO)

3P 33765
4P 33766
E59649
SD trip indication contact for manually operated devices
6 A - 240 V 33800
Low level 33803
SDE fault indication contact for manually operated devices
6 A - 240 V 33799
Low level 33802
OF ON/OFF indication contacts
6 A - 240 V 33801
Low level 33804
E59655
Up to 3 OF contacts per device
CE, CD, CT carriage switches

6 A - 240 V 33170
Low level 33171
E59656
Up to 3 CE, 1 CT, 2 CD per device

E59657
12 V DC 33809
24-30 V AC/DC 33810 33819
48-60 V AC/DC 33811 33820 33680
100-130 V AC/DC 33812 33821 33684 33681
200-250 V AC/DC 33813 33822 33685 33682
240-277 V AC 33814
380-480 V AC 33815 33824 33683
Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone
3 wire terminal (30 parts) 47071
6 wire terminal (10 parts) 47072
Jumpers (10 parts) 47900

withdrawable devices (cont.)
Chassis locking
Keylocking in disconnected position
Profalux 1 lock 33773
1 lock + 1 lock with same key profile 33774
E59650
2 locks (with different key profiles) 33775

Ronis 1 lock 33776
2 locks (with different key profiles) 33778
Option for locking in connected, disconnected and test positions 33779 (1)
Keylock kit (without keylocks)

Profalux 33769
Ronis 33770
Castell 33771
Kirk 33772
Door interlock
Right side of chassis (VPECD) 33786
Left side of chassis (VPECG) 33787
E59651
Racking interlock (VPOC)

33788
E59653
Mismatch protection (VDC)

33767
E59654
Escutcheon
33857
E46668
Transparent cover for escutcheon

33859
E59587
Blanking plate
33858
E59588
(1) No charge.

fixed and withdrawable devices
Locking for manually operated devices

Removable toggle locking system
Locking by 3 padlocks 44936
E59562
Fixed toggle locking system

E68390
Rotary handle for manually operated devices

Devices with direct rotary handles
Handle Black 33863
Red/yellow front 33864
E59563
I on
trippe
reset
d
Conversion accessory CNOMO 33866

0 OFF
Locking by keylocks Ronis Profalux

OFF position 33870 33869
OFF and ON positions 33872 33871
Keylock kit (without keylocks) 33868 33868
Mechanical interlocking
For 2 devices with extended rotary handles 33890
E70744
Devices with extended rotary handles

Handle Black 33878
Red/yellow front 33879
E59564
I on
trippe
reset
d
Telescopic (for chassis-mounted devices) 33880

0 OFF
I
ON
tripped
reset
OFF
0
Control accessories
2 advanced indication contacts (6 A - 240 V)
Early break 33882
E59573
Early make 33883
Locking and accessories for electrically operated devices

Pushbutton locking
By transparent cover + padlocks 33897
E59577
Locking in OFF position

By Profalux keylocks 1 lock 33902
E59580
By Ronis keylocks 1 lock 33903

Keylock kit (without keylocks) For Profalux keylocks 33898
For Ronis keylocks 33899
For Kirk keylocks 47517
For Castell keylocks 47518
Operation counter CDM
33895
E59581
9
0039

Communications options
For fixed devices
E59553
Modbus COM 33702 33708

Eco Modbus COM module 33703 33709
Digipact COM 33705 33711
For moving part
Modbus COM 33842 33848
Eco Modbus COM module 33714 33713
Digipact COM 33845 33851
+ chassis
Modbus 33852 33852
Digipact 33855 33855
Long-time rating plug (enhanced accuracy by limiting the setting range)
alarm
Standard 0.4 to 1 x Ir 33542
time 8 12
Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir 33543

long tr
(s) 4 16
.8 .9
E59658
Ir 2
.7 .95 20
1 24
.6 .98 .5 Ir
.5 1 @6
.4 x In
High setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir 33544

Without long-time protection OFF 33545
External sensors
External sensor for neutral + earth-fault protection (TCE)
CT rating: 400/1600 A 33576
E59659

280 mm x 115 mm 33573
E59660
Source ground return (SGR) earth fault protection

External sensor (SGR) 33579
MDGF summing module 48891
E59659
External power supply module

24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
E59661
125 V DC 54442
110 V AC 54443
220 V DC 54444
380 V DC 54445
Test equipment
Mini test kit
33594
E59921
Portable test kit

33595
E59554
Spare parts
Toggle extension 46996
E23865

(cont.)
Mechanical interlocking for source changeover

Interlocking using connecting rods for Compact electrically operated devices
Complete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + rods
2 Compact fixed devices 33910
E72941
2 Compact withdrawable devices 33913
FFO
O
hsup
NO h
I
sup
FFO
O
d e gr
ahcs
id
FFO
O
hsup
NO h
I
sup
FFO
O
d e gr
ahcs
id
Interlocking using cables for Compact electrically operated devices

Complete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + cables
2 Compact fixed devices 33911
E72942
2 Compact withdrawable devices 33914

1 Compact fixed + 1 Compact withdrawable device 33915
O
FFO
hsup
NO h
I
sup
FFO
O
d e gr
ahcs
id
O
FFO
hsup
NO h
I
sup
FFO
O
d e gr
ahcs
id

Catalogue numbers NS1600b to NS3200 fixed, front-
connected, manually operated
device
Circuit breaker
Compact NS type N
Icu = 85/70 kA to 220/415 V 3P 4P
E59555
NS1600b 34000 34003

NS2000 34006 34009
NS2500 34012 34015
NS3200 34018 34021
OFF Compact NS type H
OFF
Icu = 125/85 kA to 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS1600b 34001 34004
NS2000 34007 34010
NS2500 34013 34016
NS3200 34019 34022
(option A)
Switch-disconnector
Compact NS type NA
3P 4P
E59556
NS1600b 34024 34025

NS2000 34027 34028
NS2500 34030 34031
NS3200 34033 34034
OFF
OFF
Optional vertical connection adaptor

1600/2500 A 3P (3 parts) 33975
4P (4 parts) 33976
Note: standard for 3200 A.
Indication contacts
OF, SD, SDE 6 A - 240 V 29450 (1)
Low level 29452 (1)

E59574
Up to 3 OF, 1 SD and 1 SDE can be connected.

E59575
12 V DC 33658
24-30 V AC/DC 33659 33668
48-60 V AC/DC 33660 33669 33680
100-130 V AC/DC 33661 33670 33684 33681
200-250 V AC/DC 33662 33671 33685 33682
240-277 V AC 33663
380-480 V AC 33664 33673 33683
Locking
Removable toggle locking system
E59562
Fixed toggle locking system

E68390
(1) See Compact NS.

Catalogue numbers Accessories for NS1600b to
NS3200
Communications option
Modbus COM
33986
E59557
Eco Modbus COM module

33988
Digipact COM
OFF
OFF
33987

Long-time rating plug (enhanced accuracy by limiting the setting range)
alarm
Standard 0.4 to 1 x Ir 33542
long
time tr 8 12
(s) 4 16
Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir 33543

Ir .8 .9
.7 2 20
E59658
.95
1 24
.6 .98 .5 Ir
.5 1 @6
.4 x In
High setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir 33544

Without long-time protection OFF 33545
External sensors
External sensor for neutral + earth-fault protection (TCE)
CT rating: 1000/4000 A 34036
E59659

470 mm x 160 mm 33574
E59660
Source ground return (SGR) earth fault protection

External sensor (SGR) 33579
MDGF summing module 48891
E59659
External power supply module

24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
E59661
125 V DC 54442
110 V AC 54443
220 V DC 54444
380 V DC 54445
Test equipment
Mini test kit
33594
E59921
Portable test kit

33595
E59554
Spare parts
NS3200 toggle extension for replacement 33997
Escutcheon
33929
E88640
Interphase barriers (3 parts)

33998
E88639

Catalogue numbers Communication bus accessories
and display modules
Display modules
DMB300
Monochrome display module Max. 4 breakers 50894
E67954
DMC300
Color display module Max. 16 breakers 50895
E67955
Spare parts
DMC300PCM: DMC300 memory card 50959
RS 485 Modbus pre-wired system

RS 485 Modbus junction block
CJB306: 6 SubD 9 pins connectors junction block 50963
E67958
RS 485 Modbus connector

CSD309: 9 pins SubD with screw terminals 50964
E67959
RS 485 Modbus cables

CDM303: display module pre-wired cable, 3 m length 50960
E67960
CCP303: Masterpact or Compact pre-wired cable (4 RS 485 wires + 2 power wires) 3 m length 50961
CCS303: Masterpact or Compact pre-wired cable (Modbus slave) 3 m length 50962
E79015
CCR301: RS485 roll cable (2 RS 485 wires + 2 power wires) 60 m length 50965
E67961
Digipact Bus pre-wired system

Data concentrator DC150
Auxiliary supply voltage 110-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz and 115-125 V DC 50823
E79014
Junction block
Junction block for internal Bus 50778
E67956
Cables
Cable for internal bus 20-meter roll (0.75 mm2) 50779
100-meter roll (0.75 mm2) 50780
E67957
Converter
RS 485/RS 232 (ACE909) 12 V DC power supply included 59648
RS 485/RS 232 TSX SCA72 (1)
RS 485/Ethernet 174 CEV 300-10 (1)
RS 485/Ethernet (SMS compatible) EGX 200/400 (2)
RS 485/Ethernet (Micrologic Transparent Ready available 2003) 33507

(1) See catalogue Telemecanique.
(2) See catalogue PowerLogic System.

ABTED000000EN © 2002 - Schneider Electric - All right reserved
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

89 boulevard Franklin Roosevelt As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation
F - 92500 Rueil Malmaison (France) of the information given in this publication.
Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00
This document has been printed
on ecological paper.
http://www.schneider-electric.com
Design: Schneider Electric - Ameg.
Photos: Schneider Electric.
Printed:
BTP550E mm-aaaa

08 COMPACT Prekidaci 80-3200A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

08 COMPACT Prekidaci 80-3200A

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

08 COMPACT Prekidaci 80-3200A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

<< Back LV circuit breakers and

Compact Merlin Gerin

Building a New Electric World

Compact NS 100 to 250 A

New Compact NS,

power consumption, simplify maintenance and improve

Protection of LV distribution systems p. 14

Protection of motor feeders p. 44

The different circuit-breaker versions in the Compact NS range are designed to

A switch-disconnector version of Compact NS circuit breakers exists for circuit

Compact NS service-connection circuit breakers are specially designed for the

b tripping curves certified by utilities

Source-changeover systems p. 68 (see also the "Source-changeover systems" catalogue)

N R To ensure a continuous supply of power, some electrical installations are

The Compact NS range now covers all Compact NS100 to 630

The rating plates on the front

Ics = 100 % Icu

IEC 947-2 cat A

Ics = 100 % Icu

Ics = 100 % Icu

L: very high breaking

Compact NS1600b to 3200

Discrimination between Compact NS circuit breakers

Compact NS400 with Withdrawable Compact

Manually operated Compact NS800 Electrically operated Compact NS800

Compact NS2000 (manually operated only)

Compact circuit breakers make it possible 5 frame sizes from 80 to 3200 A

630 to 1600 A 1600 to 3200 A

Plug-in and withdrawable

Plug-in and withdrawable versions for:

range of busbar trunking.

Each Compact NS circuit breaker provides Compact NS100 to 630

STR electronic trip unit Ammeter module

Compact NS630b to 3200

Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A,

A complete system of add-on modules for 16

Selection of a Compact NS circuit breaker Presentation 2

Compliance with standards

(1) -40 °C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.

Positive contact indication

Installation in class II switchboards

With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07

Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard

With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07

With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08

With motor mechanism IP40 IK07

125 100 160 250 400 630

Compact NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600

Special case of DC systems:

1000 V distribution page 36

STR23SP electronic trip unit

Incoming circuit breakers in final distribution page 42

Rated current (A) 16… 160

(kA rms) 380/415 V:

Built-in trip unit

Compact circuit breakers

125 100 160 250 400 630

non interchangeable TM (thermal-magnetic) STR22 (electronic) STR23 (electronic) STR53 (electronic)

Compact circuit breakers

630 800 1000 1250 1600 1600 2000 2500 3200